Digital Vision Network

VisionPocket and SiteManager Software User Manual

September, 2011 24-10248-56 Revision B

Digital Vision Network

VisionPocket and SiteManager Software User Manual

September, 2011 24-10248-56 Revision B

Security Solutions (805) 522-5555 www.johnsoncontrols.com

Copyright 2011

Johnson Controls, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced without the prior permission of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Acknowledgment Cardkey P2000, BadgeMaster, and Metasys are trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc. All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

If this document is translated from the original English version by Johnson Controls, Inc., all reasonable endeavors will be used to ensure the accuracy of translation. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for any translation errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing or use of this translated material.

Due to continuous development of our products, the information in this document is subject to change without notice. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with furnishing or use of this material. Contents of this publication may be preliminary and/or may be changed at any time without any obligation to notify anyone of such revision or change, and shall not be regarded as a warranty.

Declaration of Conformity This product complies with the requirements of the European Council Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC. This equipment must not be modified for any reason and it must be installed as stated in the Manufacturer’s instruction. If this shipment (or any part thereof) is supplied as second-hand equipment, equipment for sale outside the European Economic Area or as spare parts for either a single unit or system, it is not covered by the Directives.

.................................................. 3-1 SiteManager Orientation ........................... 1-5 Chapter 2: VisionPocket Using the Main Screen.............................................................................................. 2-2 Menu Button Reference .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5 Buttons and Features..................................................... 2-14 Playing Back Video Footage and Audio.................................................................................................... 2-31 Chapter 3: SiteManager Software Upgrade Instructions................................................................................................................................................................ 2-9 Buttons and Features.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-6 Saving the SiteManager Configuration .............................. 1-3 Navigating Through the System........................................................................................ 1-1 About SiteManager ............................................... v ............................................................................................................... 1-2 Technical Support .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Inc..................................................... 2-5 Selecting a Camera ............................ 2-10 Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera................................................................................... B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls...................................................................................................................... © 2011 Johnson Controls..................... 2-16 Finding a Particular Image ................................................ 2-4 Disconnecting from a Server.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3 Logging on to SiteManager........... 2-22 Saving a Still Image ..................................................................................... 1-2 Chapter Summaries ... 1-4 DVN 100-NET . 2-19 Exporting Still Image Formats......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 DVN 5000 ................................................................................................. 2-27 Alarms and Auxiliaries .................. 2-11 Using the Optical and Digital Zooms.............................................................................................. 2-1 Buttons and Features.................................................................................TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction About VisionPocket........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-10 24-10248-56 Rev..... 1-3 Related Documentation ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 Using the PTZ Panel Screen ................................................. 1-4 DVN 3000 ..................................................... 2-6 Selecting Image Resolution and Quality .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3 Using the Main Screen............................................................... 1-2 Manual Conventions ....... 2-12 Using Presets and Tours............................................................................... 2-30 Exiting VisionPocket .............................................................................................. Inc....... 2-3 Connecting to a Server ............................................................................................................................ 2-23 Audio....................................................................................

................................................................................................................................. 3-11 Changing the Administrator Password................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-66 Send Email Alarm Action Configuration ............................................................................................................... 3-101 Camera Video Screens................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-103 Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera Dome ....................................................................................................... 3-80 Managing Alarm Events With Multiple Operations............................................................................................ 3-110 Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback ...................................... 3-46 Working with Camera Dome Internal Auxiliaries.................. 3-114 Finding a Still Image or Video Clip.... 3-26 Editing Server Dial-Up Connections.......................................................................................................................................... 3-17 Servers........ 3-44 Server Resource Menu Options................................................................................................................. 3-46 Working with Server Resources......................................... 3-41 Server Setup and Full Interface ................................................................................................ 3-62 Alarm Manager Notification.......................................... 3-79 Managing Alarm Events....................... 3-108 Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar ..........................................................................Table of Contents VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Logging Out of SiteManager ............................................................................................................... Inc............................................... 3-59 Configuring the Screen Recorder........................ 3-10 User Management ............................ 3-42 Server Resources ............................................................................................................... 3-18 Connection Quality............................................................................................................. 3-63 Configuring Alarm Events .................................................................................................................................... 3-45 Resource Status................................................................................ 3-120 vi 24-10248-56 Rev................................................................................................................................. 3-12 Creating User Accounts ............................................................................................................................... 3-31 Editing a Server Broadband Connection................................................. 3-59 Alarm Manager Overview................ 3-64 Important Notes (Configuring Alarm Events) ............................................................. 3-116 Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats ................................................... 3-77 Configuring Alarm Notification Settings................ 3-100 Camera Video Screen Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................. 3-18 Server Setup ...................................................................................................... 3-13 Editing or Deleting User Accounts ..... 3-25 Editing Server Network Connections ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-33 Renaming or Deleting Server Connections.............................................. 3-51 Configuring Dome Control Settings.................................................................................................... 3-52 Audio Channels..................................................................................................................................................... 3-38 Editing Server Properties ....... 3-20 Exporting Servers....... 3-20 Creating or Importing a New Server................................................................................................ 3-16 Changing the User Password ......................................... 3-11 Editing the Admin Account.......................................................... 3-56 Configuring the SMTP Server Settings ................................................................................................... © 2011 Johnson Controls..................................................... 3-102 Working with the Camera Video Screen Options................................................................................................................................................................ 3-53 Alarm Manager ................. 3-99 Silencing Server Alarms.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-109 Buttons and Features (Camera Video Screen Toolbar)....................................................................................................... 3-27 Editing Server VPN Connections ................................................................................................................................................ 3-56 Server Alarm Call Priority.................................................................. 3-29 Editing Server Direct Connections ....................................................................................... 3-35 Connecting to the Servers..................................................................... 3-106 Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control ....... 3-113 Playing Back Video Footage and Audio............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-65 How to Configure Alarm Events (Procedure) ..................................................................................................... Inc........................................................................ B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls..................................

........................................................................................................................................... 3-145 Creating a New Map .................................................. 3-132 Working with Group Resources ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-129 Groups ........................................................................................................... vii ........................ 3-121 Saving a Video Clip....................................... 3-178 Working with View Resources................... 3-155 2D Map Resource Menu Options................................. 3-199 Monitor Menu Options.......... 3-155 3D Map Resource Menu Options........... 3-121 Saving a Still Image ................................. 3-168 Buttons and Features (View Screen) ......................................................................................................... 3-141 Map Menu Options.......................... 3-128 Saving Video Footage on the Fly............................ 3-130 Group Menu Options.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-144 Buttons and Features (3D Map Toolbar)......... 3-165 View Menu Options......................................................................................................................................... 3-197 Monitors ....................................................................................... 3-205 Adding Network Monitors .............................................................................................. 3-142 Buttons and Features (2D Map Toolbar).............................. 3-151 Map Resources................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-172 Designing the View Screen Layouts .................................................................................................... 3-157 Adding Map Resources.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-160 Views ................................................................................................................................ 3-135 Maps ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-204 Buttons and Features (Sequence Screen)............................................................................. 3-181 Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-143 The 3D Map Screen..................................................... 3-201 The Monitor Panel............................. © 2011 Johnson Controls............................................................................................................ 3-157 3D Map Resource Status .................................................................................................................................................................... Inc................................................................................................................... 3-122 Configuring the Window Recorder ............................................................................................................... 3-208 24-10248-56 Rev................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-166 The View Screen............................................... 3-170 Working with the View Screen Options....... 3-131 Adding Group Resources............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-201 Buttons and Features (Monitor Panel) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-175 Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps ................................................................................ 3-169 Creating a New View.......................................................... B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls................ 3-130 Creating a New Group ..................................................................... 3-206 Adding Resources to a VGA Monitor .......................VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table of Contents Still Image File Type Features ... 3-141 The 2D Map Screen....................................................................................................................... 3-134 Resource Status................................................................................................. 3-184 Saving Still Images....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-134 Group Resource Menu Options ........................................................................................... 3-200 Monitor Menu Options for Client VGA Monitors ............ 3-158 Working with Map Resources .......................................................................................... 3-200 Menu Options for Network (DVN 100-NET) Monitors ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-156 Map Hierarchy Resource Status and 2D Map Resource Icon Status ................................ 3-205 Editing Monitors ................................................ 3-146 Working with 2D Maps ................. 3-190 Views as Map Resources.......... 3-188 Saving Video Clips..................................................................................................................................................... 3-202 The Sequence Screen ............... Inc................................. 3-150 Working with 3D Maps ....... 3-120 Video Clip File Formats.................................................

..................................................................................... 3-209 Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Sequence Resource Mode) ................ 3-253 Monitoring the Server Status Checks............................. 3-227 Other Quad View Configuration Options......................................................................................... 3-259 Configuring the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard............................................................................................................................... 3-213 Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor (Procedure) .................................... 3-255 Searching the Hierarchies...................................................................................................................... 3-241 Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop ............................................................................... 3-217 Disconnecting a Monitor................................................................... 3-216 Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors............ 3-257 Pelco® 9760 Keyboard Integration .................................. 3-239 Virtual Video Desktop................................................................................................ 3-216 Connecting to Network Monitors.................................................................. Inc................................................................................................... 3-264 VisionWeb ActiveX Manager....................................... 3-218 Cameras Played Back on SiteManager Monitors ................................................................................................................... 3-261 Operating the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard ................ 3-218 Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors ......... 3-236 Maintenance ......................................................................... 3-240 Options in the Windows Menu .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-221 Deleting Network Monitors.......... 3-214 Removing a Camera from a Network Monitor....................................................................................................................................................... 3-210 Removing VGA Monitor Resources ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-244 Limiting Login Attempts............................................................................... 3-226 Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature....................... 3-245 Configuring the System Log.......................................................................................................Table of Contents VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Single Resource Mode) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-266 Index viii 24-10248-56 Rev...................... ............... 3-218 Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on VGA Monitors ..................................................................... 3-234 Connecting a Monitor Group .................................................................. 3-257 Installing the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard ............................ B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls........................................... 3-258 B&B Electronics RS-232 to RS-485 (Model 485OT9L) Converter Installation..................... 3-242 Recording User’s Desktop Activity..................................................... 3-256 Configuring Proprietary Keyboard Settings..... 3-233 Monitor Group Menu Options............................................. Inc............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-249 Configuring Regular Server Status Checks ................... 3-246 Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel......................................................... 3-239 Buttons and Features (Virtual Video Desktop)................................................................................................. 3-233 Creating a Monitor Group................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-212 Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor................................................ 3-231 Monitor Groups ............................................ 3-220 Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on Monitors .. © 2011 Johnson Controls..... 3-263 Managing the SiteManager Configuration...............................................

VisionPocket offers full remote live viewing.Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION This manual describes how to use the following client software applications for Digital Vision Network (DVN) systems:   VisionPocket SiteManager NOTE RemoteView is no longer supported. 24-10248-56 Rev. ABOUT VISIONPOCKET VisionPocket is a fully functional client application running on Microsoft® Windows® CE or PocketPC for all Digital Vision Network Systems. playback. and bi-directional audio transmission for cameras connected to any single DVN server in a DVN Digital CCTV Network. using compatible Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) devices. depending on the software version you are using. This manual does not cover the RemoteControl and VisionWeb client software applications. full Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) camera control. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. NOTE The screen captures shown in this manual may differ slightly. refer to the following manuals:   DVN 5000 Series Software User Manual DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual See also “Related Documentation” on page 1-4. For information on RemoteControl and VisionWeb. © 2011 Johnson Controls. However. RemoteControl is still supported. This application enables you to remotely access the DVN system via TCP/IP. Inc. 1-1 .

sales/service office. provides a general overview of this user manual. describes the procedures for using SiteManager software to control live view. among other features. System users can get answers to operator questions by calling the local Johnson Controls Inc. export. Chapter 2: VisionPocket.   TECHNICAL SUPPORT Technical assistance is provided to Johnson Controls authorized dealer representatives from 5 a. Inc. ABOUT SITEMANAGER The SiteManager software is a multi-server client software used to access many network-connected DVN systems simultaneously. The RemoteControl client can be opened within SiteManager. PT to 5 p. Chapter 3: SiteManager. playback. and logging. logical groups of resources.m. export. provides instructions for using VisionPocket software on a PDA device to view live or recorded images (with audio) and control PTZ cameras. The authorized dealer representatives can also provide you with information on the maintenance contracts and the on-site field service. SiteManager includes support for multiple server. 1-2 24-10248-56 Rev. PT Monday through Friday. user-defined multiple camera views. and PTZ control for multiple cameras from multiple DVN servers over multiple network interfaces. as well as 2D maps. © 2011 Johnson Controls.m. Conventions used throughout the manual are also defined. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. SiteManager extends the RemoteControl functionality to multi-server environments. . refer to the documents listed in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4.Introduction VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE Internet access may require installation of additional components. such as VPN (Virtual Private Network) Client or RAS (Remote Access Service) Client. CHAPTER SUMMARIES  Chapter 1: Introduction. and other basic functions. sophisticated alarm and event management. For detailed information on the RemoteControl client application. playback. Contact your system administrator for setup instructions. allowing full setup and control of any network-connected DVN server. multiple camera live view. its structure and how to use the information within it. 3D maps. PTZ control. find. find.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Introduction MANUAL CONVENTIONS The following items are used throughout this manual to indicate special circumstances. submenu. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. then release the mouse button. Note that “click” always refers to the left mouse button. exceptions. if not performed exactly as stated. 1-3 . important points regarding the equipment or personal safety. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Move the mouse cursor over the object indicated and press and release the left mouse button once. may cause damage to equipment or make your system non-operational. Quickly press twice and release the left mouse button. Inc. Navigating Through the System Note the following terms and documentation standards in this manual when following instructions: Select This term directs you to select a menu. Clear Click Double-click Right-click Click and Drag 24-10248-56 Rev. Move the mouse cursor over the object indicated and press and release the right mouse button once. drag and point to where you want to place the object. Press and hold down the left mouse button to select an item. or button option. Click again on a selected object to clear the option. or to emphasize a particular point. IMPORTANT Important messages remind you that certain actions. NOTE Notes indicate additional or special information relevant to the current topic or procedure.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. .Introduction VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual RELATED DOCUMENTATION DVN 5000 Table 1-1: Related Documentation (DVN 5000) Document Title DVN 5000 Rackmount Series Installation Guide DVN 5000 Desktop Series Quick Installation Guide DVN 5000 Series System Drive Replacement Instructions DVN 5000 Rackmount Series RAID Management Guide DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 5000 Series Software User Manual DVN 5000 Series Server Upgrade Wizard DVN 5000 and 100-NET Series Software Release Notes DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series Software Development Kit (SDK) Reference Manual DVN 5000 Rackmount Series Quick Startup Guide DVN SiteManager Quick Guide Part Number 24-10129-4 24-10129-55 24-10129-101 24-10177-3 24-10248-5 24-10248-13 24-10520-49 24-10318-37 24-10352-18 24-10520-14 24-10248-137 DVN 3000 Table 1-2: Related Documentation (DVN 3000) Document Title DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Series Quick Installation Guide for DVN 3016 DVN 3000 Series Quick Installation Guide for DVN 3000-NET DVN 3000 Series Quick Installation Guide for DVN 3008 PD and DVN 3004 PD DVN 3008 D and DVN 3004 Quick Installation Guide DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series Software Development Kit (SDK) Reference Manual DVN SiteManager Quick Guide Part Number 09-9268-01 09-9269-01 24-10129-12 24-10129-20 24-10129-39 24-10129-47 24-10352-18 24-10248-137 1-4 24-10248-56 Rev.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Introduction DVN 100-NET Table 1-3: Related Documentation (DVN 100-NET) Document Title DVN 100-NET Quick Installation Guide DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual DVN 5000 and 100-NET Series Software Release Notes DVN SiteManager Quick Guide Part Number 24-10216-5 24-10216-13 24-10318-37 24-10248-137 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 1-5 . Inc.

© 2011 Johnson Controls.Introduction VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 1-6 24-10248-56 Rev. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. Inc.

Chapter 2 VISIONPOCKET This chapter discusses the basic features of VisionPocket and how to use this application. USING THE MAIN SCREEN The Main screen provides access to VisionPocket features and screens.264. H. The Main screen can be split into the following: • • • • Video window PTZ control Camera button Main button • • • • Save button Find button Login button Alarm button • • • • Audio button Close button Menu button Status bar Close Video window PTZ control Camera selection Main Alarm Playback pad Login/Setup Audio Menu button Save Find Status bar 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. See the following figure. 2-1 . Inc. NOTE VisionPocket does not support Megapixel. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. and MJPEG video images.

Displays the Setup screen.jpeg image. Provides standard video controls that allow you to play back recorded video clips. allowing you to monitor the status of all alarms and auxiliaries of the server to which you are connected. Video window PTZ control Displays live or played back video clips and images. Displays the Find panel screen and allows you to search the recorded footage for the camera whose video footage and audio is currently being played back. and delete DVN server connections connect to a DVN server disconnect from a DVN server select the compression protocol create and edit login information (username and password) Playback pad Login/Setup Save Displays the Save panel screen. allowing you to: • • • • • • • select the camera you wish to view control camera domes play back recorded video footage and audio access the Setup screen save a still image search the recorded video footage and audio turn the audio channel(s) on and off Camera selection Main Alarm Displays the Alarm/Auxiliary panel screen. allowing you to select which camera you wish to view in the video window.png or . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. . and to turn auxiliaries on and off.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE All remaining screen captures of the VisionPocket user interface in this chapter do not display the menu button and status bar. allowing you to: • • • • • create. Find Audio 2-2 . edit.bmp. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If the camera is PTZ enabled. opens the PTZ panel screen where you can use the PTZ controls and move the selected camera to preset positions or according to preset tours. Allows you to turn the enabled audio channel(s) on or off. Buttons and Features This section briefly describes each feature on the VisionPocket Main screen. Displays the Main screen. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. allowing you to export a still image as a . Displays the camera selection panel screen. Inc.

the current date and time at the server. Table 2-1: Menu Button Reference Menu Option Disconnect Quit Description Disconnects the VisionPocket client from the server to which it is currently connected. Provides the same video controls that are available on the Playback pad. Provides status information. such as whether the interface is currently in live or playback mode. Network scanner Not supported in this release. See Table 2-1 for a brief description of each Menu option. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Close Menu button VisionPocket Allows you to close the VisionPocket application. Allows you to select one of the cameras connected and configured at the DVN server. Press this button when the instructions in this chapter ask you to press Menu or the Menu button. Saves a camera image in the JPEG format to the PDA’s My Devices directory. 2-3 . See “Playback pad” on page 2-2. Allows you to modify the image resolution and quality settings. See “Menu Button Reference” for more information. Status bar Menu Button Reference The Menu button allows you to select a number of VisionPocket functions. most of which can also be configured and controlled from other areas of the Main screen. Allows you to select a defined PTZ camera tour. Allows you to select a defined PTZ camera preset. and the current resolution setting. Disconnects the VisionPocket client from the server to which it is currently connected and closes the VisionPocket application. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. Allows you to perform and configure numerous VisionPocket functions using a selection menu. Source Play mode Video adaptive Presets Tours Grab a picture Connection manager Opens the Login/Setup screen where you can configure server connections and connect to a DVN server. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc.

VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual CONNECTING TO A SERVER The following procedures describe how to access VisionPocket on a PDA and how to connect to a DVN server. 2. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The VisionPocket application launches. 3. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for information about creating server connections.  To log on to VisionPocket and connect to a server: 1. Inc. The VisionPocket icon will be listed. Press the VisionPocket icon. Inc. Access the Programs folder on your PDA. 2-4 24-10248-56 Rev. . The Login/Setup screen appears. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Press the Login/Setup button or press Menu>Connection Manager. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for information about creating server connections.

Inc. Press the Prot drop-down arrow to display the protocol menu.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 4. see “Connecting to a Server” on page 2-4. 2. 4. To exit VisionPocket. 3. Press Menu>Disconnect or perform steps 2 through 4. The server to which you are currently connected appears in the Name box. Disconnecting from a Server The following procedures describe how to disconnect from the DVN server to which you are connected. continue with step 5. 24-10248-56 Rev. Press the Login/Setup button. Press Disc. After a few moments the connection with the server will be established and the Main screen will be displayed. The server will be highlighted and the selected server’s connection settings will be displayed. 8. If one or more server connections have already been defined. and select the Server you wish to connect to in the server list. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. VisionPocket disconnects from the server. press the Close button.  To disconnect from a server: 1. 5. Enter the login password in the Pass text box. 5. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Enter the user login name in the User text box. access the Main screen by pressing the Main button on any other screen. The PDA keyboard should pop up automatically when you press on any text box. 6. If the Main screen is not currently displayed. The Login/Setup screen appears. Press Conn. Refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4 for information about creating server connections. select the server to which you wish to connect and press Conn. To connect to a different server. After a few moments the connection with the server will be established and the Main screen will be displayed. If no server connection is defined. to connect to the selected server. 6. 2-5 . Inc.. 7.

  For additional information. You may use PTZ controls only if the selected camera is a PTZ camera. 2-6 24-10248-56 Rev. Press the Camera button.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SELECTING A CAMERA VisionPocket allows you to access any of the cameras connected to the DVN server to which you are connected. you can:      view the camera’s live video footage and audio view the camera’s playback video footage and audio use the camera’s PTZ controls search through the camera’s recorded video footage and audio save a still image NOTES  Live video is available only if present at time of viewing. see:     “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 2-16 “Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera” on page 2-11 “Finding a Particular Image” on page 2-19 “Saving a Still Image” on page 2-23  To select the camera you wish to view: 1. Inc. audio is available only if it has been configured correctly. Once you have selected the camera you wish to view. Inc. Playback is available only if video has been recorded. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

NOTE You may also select a camera by pressing Menu>Source and then selecting the desired camera. selecting a lower image quality results in better video footage and audio transmission.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 2. Select the camera you wish to view by pressing the required Camera button. 2-7 . So if there is little bandwidth available to the PDA. The selected camera’s live video footage will be displayed in the video window. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Selecting Image Resolution and Quality Selecting the image resolution and quality of all of the connected cameras allows you to adjust the viewed image quality and modify the image file size.  To select the global image resolution and quality: 1. The higher the image quality. Inc. NOTE The selected image resolution and quality applies to all cameras. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. Press the Camera button. the larger the image file size and the more bandwidth is required to transmit the image. You can select one of the following image resolutions:    Full resolution CIF resolution QCIF resolution For each selected resolution. you may select the image quality from 10% to a full 100%. and thus the amount of bandwidth required to transmit the image. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. press Menu>Video adaptive> Quality and select one of the quality settings. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. The selected camera’s live video footage appears in the video window. such as CIF and QCIF. 2-8 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. . To select a different image resolution setting. For detailed information on resolution settings. Select the camera you wish to view while adjusting the image resolution and quality. To select a different image quality setting. Inc. 3. verify that the Enabled option is selected. and select one of the resolution settings. press Menu>Video adaptive. 4. Inc.

Observe the changes in image resolution and quality in the video window. Continue to increase or decrease the image quality until you achieve the desired image quality. Presets and tours do not apply to fixed cameras. 2-9 . NOTE The higher the image quality.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 5. Inc. press the Quality Minus button. see the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. 7. the larger the image file size and the more bandwidth is required to transmit the image. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The PTZ panel screen appears. Inc. The selected image resolution and quality level will be displayed in the dynamic status bar at the bottom of the PDA screen where you can also observe the changes in the image file size. press the Quality Plus button. To decrease the image quality. To do this. press the PTZ button on the Main screen. You may also modify the image quality settings on the PTZ panel screen. USING THE PTZ PANEL SCREEN The PTZ panel screen provides you with tools to control PTZ-enabled cameras. 6. 24-10248-56 Rev. You may move the cameras manually using the camera remote control dome or automatically by selecting a preset or tour. © 2011 Johnson Controls. For detailed information about presets and tours. or PTZ panel on a Fixed Camera PTZ panel on a PTZ camera dome To increase the image quality.

Allows you to select the image quality. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Allows you to control the amount light that enters the camera. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Allows you to move a camera to a predefined position that corresponds to the selected preset. . You may also select a preset with the Menu button. Focus controls Allows you to control the camera lens in order to achieve the desired focus for PTZ-enabled and fixed cameras. The PTZ panel screen can be split into the following: • • • • Focus controls Quality controls Tours drop-down list Zoom control • • • Iris controls Presets drop-down list Pan/tilt controls Iris controls Quality controls Focus controls Presets drop-down list Tours drop-down list Pan/tilt controls Zoom control Buttons and Features This section briefly describes each feature on the PTZ panel screen. The selected image quality will apply to all cameras. Inc. Iris controls Quality controls Presets Tours 2-10 24-10248-56 Rev. You may also select a tour with the Menu button.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual See the following figure. Allows you to shift a camera between the predefined camera movement sequences (tour). Inc. the larger the image file size and the more bandwidth is required to transmit the image. The higher the image quality.

Select the camera dome you wish to control by selecting the required Camera button. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera If PTZ camera domes are connected to the DVN server to which you are connected via VisionPocket. The PTZ panel screen appears.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Pan/tilt controls Zoom control VisionPocket Allows you to pan and tilt a PTZ camera. 2-11 . and adjust the camera dome’s focus. The selected camera dome’s live video footage appears in the video window. 2. 3. Allows you to zoom in and out. zoom level.  To use the PTZ function via the PTZ panel: 1. Inc. iris and quality. 24-10248-56 Rev. Press the Camera Selection button. Inc. Press the PTZ button. you can control the camera dome position. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

To use the pan/tilt controls. Observe the changes in the camera dome position in the video window. 7. you will be able to adjust the global image quality.”  To use the Optical and Digital zoom functions: 1.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Central point Arrows 4. therefore. NOTE If you select a camera that has no PTZ functionality. Press the Camera Selection button.side of the slide respectively. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The optical zoom actually engages the PTZ camera dome’s lens zoom.buttons until you achieve the desired light balance. or press the Arrows as required to achieve smaller and more precise camera movements. See “Selecting Image Resolution and Quality” on page 2-7 for additional information. 6. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue.buttons until you achieve the desired focus. change the iris by pressing the Iris + or . 5. If required. press and drag the Zoom point towards the + or the . Inc. If required. 2-12 24-10248-56 Rev. change the focus by pressing the Focus + or . Inc. Using the Optical and Digital Zooms VisionPocket provides users with two types of zoom: the optical zoom and the digital zoom. The digital zoom does not engage the camera dome’s lens but increases or decreases the size of each pixel in the picture. Use the pan/tilt controls to pan or tilt the camera. however. © 2011 Johnson Controls. you cannot use the PTZ controls. See “Using the Optical and Digital Zooms” on page 2-12 for additional information about using the zoom function. it changes the size of the image with corresponding changes in “graininess. To zoom in or out. press and drag the Central point as required. .

24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The PTZ panel screen appears. Select the camera dome you wish to control by pressing the associated Camera button. Press the PTZ button. Inc. 3. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The selected camera dome’s live video footage appears in the video window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 2. Inc. 2-13 .

To zoom out using the optical zoom. To zoom out using the digital zoom. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window. 7. Using Presets and Tours VisionPocket allows you to move PTZ camera domes to pre-set positions or tours by using the PTZ panel screen or the Menu button.  Selecting a PTZ camera dome preset results in the camera dome moving to a predefined position that corresponds to the selected preset.  Presets and tours available on VisionPocket correspond to the presets and tours configured on the server to which you are connected.side of the zoom slide until you achieve the desired optical zoom level.  To select a preset or engage a tour: 1. 6. you must first reach the upper zoom limit of the optical zoom. thus providing different “scenes” in quick succession. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. Continue to press and drag the Zoom point until you achieve the desired digital zoom level. Selecting a PTZ camera dome tour results in the camera shifting between predefined camera movement sequences. To zoom in using the optical zoom.side of the zoom. Now press and drag the Zoom point again towards the + side of the zoom slide to engage the digital zoom. Inc. 5.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 4. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Press and drag the Zoom point towards the + side of the zoom slide until you cannot zoom in any further and then release the Zoom point. 2-14 24-10248-56 Rev. For information on how to create and configure presets and tours. Press and drag the Zoom point towards the . press and drag the Zoom point towards the + side of the zoom slide until you achieve the desired optical zoom level. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. Press the Camera Selection button. Inc. To zoom in using the digital zoom. © 2011 Johnson Controls. press and drag the Zoom point towards the . . you can only zoom out using the digital zoom if the camera dome is already digitally zoomed in (see the previous step).

The PTZ panel screen appears. The selected camera dome’s live video footage appears in the video window. Select the camera dome you wish to control by pressing the required Camera button. 24-10248-56 Rev. The camera dome moves to the selected preset position. Select a Preset from the drop-down list. 3. 4. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2-15 . Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 2. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Press the PTZ button.

2. For detailed information about camera sectors. The selected tour starts. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Audio playback is only available when a PDA is connected to a DVN server and the Wavelet protocol is selected. or if there is a vast amount of footage to play back. Refer to “Finding a Particular Image” on page 2-19. PLAYING BACK VIDEO FOOTAGE AND AUDIO VisionPocket enables you to play back recorded prime sector video footage and audio without any interruption to the recording process. If you know the camera and the exact time period you would like to play back. 2-16 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. .VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 5. Inc. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. NOTE You may also use the Menu button to select a preset or tour. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. Select a Tour from the drop-down list. use the Find function.  To play back video footage and audio: 1. This then allows you to use the Find function or Save a still image. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information. The selected tour will continue to play until you select a preset. Select the camera from which you wish to play back video footage and audio. Inc. Press the Camera Selection button. The selected camera’s live video footage appears in the video window.

Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Press the Play button. or press Menu>Play mode>Play. 4. The playback begins. Press the Main button.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 3. Also. 24-10248-56 Rev. Audio will be played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. the PDA’s audio settings should be configured correctly. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. to initiate playback of the selected camera’s video footage and audio. Inc. 2-17 . The Main screen appears with the selected camera’s live video footage in the video window.

Refer to the following definitions. The selected speed will display in the dynamic status bar at the bottom of the PDA screen. Rewind Stop Play Pause Forward Start End Save Find 5. Press the Rewind button to fast rewind the video footage. Press the End button to go to the end of the video footage. repeatedly press the Rewind button until you reach the desired speed. Press the Play button to play back the video footage. Inc. Press the Forward button to fast forward the video footage. To increase the speed of the rewind function. Inc. To increase the speed of the fast forward function. Start End Play Press the Start button to go to the start of the video footage. . Select one of the following functions. The selected speed will display in the dynamic status bar at the bottom of the PDA screen. Forward Rewind 2-18 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The playback will start.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. repeatedly press the Forward button until you reach the desired speed.

To resume playback. © 2011 Johnson Controls. press the Pause button and then repeatedly press Forward or Rewind to move through the video footage frame-by-frame in the desired direction. or to view the video footage frame-by-frame. Press the Stop button to stop playback. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. press the Forward or Rewind button as required. To play back frame-by-frame. Inc. the Find function allows you to simply enter the date and time of the video footage you are interested in and instantly extract the video footage for the currently selected camera. press the Play button. Playback will stop at the chosen point in the video footage to let you view a still image. Press the Camera Selection button. 24-10248-56 Rev. The playback stops and live footage appears in the video window. 2-19 . 7. Once you locate the video footage.  To use the Find function: 1. FINDING A PARTICULAR IMAGE For quick and accurate video footage retrieval. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Repeat all steps to play back video footage and audio from a different camera. Stop NOTE All playback pad options are also available by pressing Menu>Play mode. Inc. See “Saving a Still Image” on page 2-23 for detailed information about saving still images. you may save a still image or images of interest as required. 6.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Pause VisionPocket Press the Pause button to pause the video footage.

Also. Audio will be played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. Press the Play button. The selected camera’s live video footage appears in the video window. Select the camera whose video footage you wish to search. 4. Inc.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. The playback begins. to initiate playback of the selected camera’s video footage and audio. . 2-20 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. 3. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Main screen appears with the selected camera’s live video footage in the video window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the PDA’s audio settings should be configured correctly. Press the Main button. or press Menu>Play mode>Play.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev. In the previous screen.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. Inc. the selected camera does not have an audio channel associated with it and audio. Inc. therefore. The calendar window appears. it will not be audible during live viewing or video playback. 6. Press the Find button. The calendar window closes and the selected date appears in the Date drop-down list. The Find panel screen appears and the video footage continues to play back. 7. 5. You can alternatively enter the required date in the Date drop-down list. Select the month and day required. 2-21 . Press the Date drop-down arrow. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

The playback will cease. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 2-16 for detailed information about the playback functions. To save a still image. Repeat the same steps to search through the recorded video footage and audio of a different camera. Press the Find button. NOTE When saving an image with the Menu>Grab a picture option. 10. 13.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 8. EXPORTING STILL IMAGE FORMATS You have the option to save still images in the following file formats:    Portable Network Graphics Compressed JPEG Interchange Format Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format. The Find panel will close and the playback will continue. see “Saving a Still Image” on page 2-23 for detailed information. 9. Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Large High Yes Common. see Table 2-2. Press the Cancel button once you have finished searching the video footage. All values are descriptive and relative. 15. To help you choose the file type that best suits your needs. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. DVN 5000 Series software not required. To go to a different point in time. DVN 5000 Series software not required. 14. Inc. Use the playback functions as required. DVN 5000 Series software not required. The video footage will be played back from the selected date and time. VisionPocket saves the image only in the JPEG format. 11. Select the required time by using the Time scroll bar or entering the required time in the Time text box. 12. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Table 2-2: Still Image Format Feature Comparison Features File Size Image Quality Tamper Proof System Compatibility Compressed JPEG Interchange Small Medium Yes Common. Portable Network Graphics Medium Medium No Common. . Press the Stop button. 2-22 24-10248-56 Rev. repeat steps 6 to 9.

VisionPocket Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Common format and identical visual quality to the original recording as it is uncompressed. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Disadvantages Slight loss of visual quality due to JPEG compression. VisionPocket saves the image only in the JPEG format. Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 2-2: Still Image Format Feature Comparison Features Advantages Compressed JPEG Interchange Common format and good image quality relative to the file size. See “Exporting Still Image Formats” on page 2-22 for information about the formats. Press the Camera Selection button. Portable Network Graphics Common format and good image quality relative to the file size. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. Not tamper proof. Large file size. NOTE When saving an image with the Menu>Grab a picture option. 2-23 . you may save it in one of the following three formats:    Portable Network Graphics Compressed JPEG Interchange Format Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format. SAVING A STILL IMAGE Once you locate the still image of interest. Inc.  To save a still image: 1. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev.

Press the Main button. Audio is played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. The playback will begin. or press Menu>Play mode>Play. The Main screen appears with the selected camera’s live video footage in the video window. . Select the camera whose still image(s) you wish to save. Inc. 3. the PDA’s audio settings should be configured correctly. to initiate playback of the selected camera’s video footage and audio. Inc. 2-24 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Also. Press the Play button. The selected camera’s live video footage appears in the video window.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 4.

press the Pause button or press Menu>Play mode>Pause. The image will be saved to the PDA’s My Devices directory. Once you locate the desired still image. To locate the still image you wish to save. The Save panel screen appears. you can only save the image in the JPEG format when using this method.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. Inc. use the playback functions as described in “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 2-16 or use the Find function as described in “Finding a Particular Image” on page 2-19. However. 2-25 . Inc. Press the Save button. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. NOTE You may also save the image by pressing Menu>Grab a picture. The playback is paused and the desired still image is displayed in the video window. 5. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 6. 7. 24-10248-56 Rev.

Inc. Press the + sign. enter it in the top text box. the camera name. Select the preferred directory where you wish to save the still image. The PDA keyboard should pop up automatically when you press on any text box. Select the preferred file format. 15. Press the . Inc. Each saved image is.sign. . 10. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The save panel appears and the playback remains paused. Press the Save button. by default. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Press the Cancel button. and the date.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 8. 12. The still image is saved. The browse window appears. The browse window closes. 11. given a name which includes the source server. 2-26 24-10248-56 Rev. Press the bottom drop-down arrow to display the format menu. To assign a different name. 9. 13. 14.

The playback stops and live video footage is displayed. Press the Stop button. To save a different still image from the same camera. repeat all previous steps. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. Inc. Audio is available if the PDA is connected to a DVN server using the Wavelet protocol and the PDA’s audio settings are configured correctly. 2-27 . Audio will be played back with video footage only if audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. 24-10248-56 Rev.  To listen to live audio: 1. When you select to display a camera. Press the Camera Selection button. 17. live audio is audible if live audio is present at the time of viewing. AUDIO VisionPocket enables you to listen to live and recorded audio. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. repeat steps 4 to 16. To save a still image from a different camera.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VisionPocket 16. refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4. 18. For detailed information about configuring audio channels.

The audio channel will turn off. Also. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The audio channel will turn on. If the audio channel is turned on. the Audio button will be disabled. Inc. 4. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the Audio button will be blue. The Main screen appears with the selected camera still displayed in the video window. press the Audio button. 2-28 24-10248-56 Rev. Press the Main button. you will hear the camera’s live audio. If the audio channel is turned on and live audio is present at the time of viewing. press the Audio button. To turn off the audio channel. NOTE If the selected camera does not have an audio channel associated with it. The selected camera’s live video footage appears in the video window. To turn on the audio channel. . Select the camera whose live audio you wish to listen to by pressing the desired Camera button. the PDA’s audio settings should be configured correctly. 3. 5.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2.

the Audio button will be blue. You will hear the camera’s live audio if the audio channel is turned on and live audio is present at the time of viewing. 4. 2-29 . The audio channel turns on. Also. Press the Main button. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To listen to recorded audio: VisionPocket 1. 5. Select the camera whose recorded audio you wish to listen to by pressing the desired Camera button. Inc. 2. The audio channel turns off. Inc. The camera selection panel screen appears and the Camera button turns blue. The selected camera’s live video footage appears in the video window. press the Audio button. If the audio channel is turned on. The Main screen appears with the selected camera still displayed in the video window. 3. To turn on the audio channel. press the Audio button. the PDA’s audio settings should be configured correctly. Press the Camera Selection button. To turn off the audio channel.

Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. or press Menu>Play mode>Play. refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4. ALARMS AND AUXILIARIES The Alarm/Auxiliaries panel screen allows you to monitor the states of all alarm inputs and auxiliary outputs in real time. To stop playback. . the Audio button will be disabled 6. Press the Play button. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Audio will be played back only if the audio channel is turned on and audio has been recorded for the selected camera with the video footage currently being played back. The playback will begin. 2-30 24-10248-56 Rev. The number of available alarms and auxiliary outputs is determined by the type and model of the DVN server. In addition. you can turn the auxiliary outputs on and off. Use the playback functions as described in step 5 on page 2-18. the PDA’s audio settings should be configured correctly. Inc. to initiate playback of the selected camera’s video footage and audio. For detailed information about alarms and auxiliary outputs.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE If the selected camera does not have an audio channel associated with it. The dynamic status bar at the bottom of your PDA screen displays all of the selected playback functions. Also. press the Stop button. 7. 8.

 Displays if an alarm is active/triggered. 2-31 .  Displays if an auxiliary output port is open. EXITING VISIONPOCKET When you no longer wish to use VisionPocket. Press the Alarm button. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The alarm/auxiliary panel screen appears. you should close the application.  Displays if an alarm is inactive/dormant.  Displays if an auxiliary output port is closed. Inc. Inc. You will exit VisionPocket and the application will be closed.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To monitor the status of alarms and auxiliaries: VisionPocket 1. Press the Close button (the X in the upper-right corner of the screen) or press Menu>Quit.  To exit VisionPocket: 1. 24-10248-56 Rev.

Inc.VisionPocket VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2-32 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

v2. among other features.johnsoncontrols. SOFTWARE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS The section provides step-by-step instructions for upgrading SiteManager client software to Release 4. PTZ control. logical groups of resources. export. regardless of the DVN model. multiple camera live view. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. SiteManager extends RemoteControl functionality to multi-server environments.1. or you can download the file for free from the following site: ftp://cardkey:cardkey2000@ftp2.com/cardkey-out/dvn_software/5000. user-defined multiple camera views. NOTE Synchronized multiple camera playback only applies to DVN 5000 Series servers. and other basic functions.10 We recommend downloading the file before attempting the upgrade. find. and logging. We do not recommend running the file directly from the FTP site. playback. The RemoteControl client can be opened within SiteManager. sophisticated alarm and event management. allowing full setup and control of any network-connected Johnson Controls DVN server. SiteManager includes support for multiple server. 3D maps. as well as 2D maps. The software upgrade file is included on the installation media provided in the kit. This chapter describes all of the features of SiteManager and provides information on how to gain the full benefit from this application.Chapter 3 SITEMANAGER SiteManager software is a multi-server client software used to access many network-connected Johnson Controls DVN systems simultaneously. spot monitor outputs. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-1 .

The SiteManager Setup Wizard appears. Locate the JCI SiteManager 4. 5. (shown in the screen capture below). Refer to the Microsoft documentation or online help for assistance. The License Agreement screen appears. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Read the Software License Agreement. 3.1. . 2. If you select Custom. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To upgrade the SiteManager software: 1. you may choose to install specific software components. Uninstall the current DVN SiteManager software using the Microsoft Add/Remove Programs application. 3-2 24-10248-56 Rev.x. 4. Select the type of installation (Full or Custom) and click Next. Inc. select the check box I accept the terms in the License Agreement and click Next. Inc. Click Next.exe file and double-click it.

Once the administrator configures the user accounts. Once the software has been successfully installed. SITEMANAGER ORIENTATION Logging on to SiteManager The system administrator controls access to SiteManager resources (servers. In addition. select whether you wish to reboot now or later. 8. specifying the level of access and the rights to SiteManager resources. maps. Wait a few moments while the SiteManager Setup Wizard automatically performs all the necessary tasks. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. you may log on to SiteManager. To accept the default destination folder. 3-3 . 9. Inc. click Install. and click Finish. and/or views). he/she creates and configures user accounts for individual users. Inc. 7. Repeat this entire procedure for each client machine.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 6. 24-10248-56 Rev. groups.

The SiteManager Main screen appears. The server will be automatically connected and the user logging on will have the same rights to the Johnson Controls DVN server resources as the user whose user name and password have been saved.  To log on to SiteManager: 1. the Connecting to server dialog box appears. 3. Inc. For more information. NOTE For additional information about server autoconnection. If you prefer to use the Classic Start menu. see “Servers” on page 3-18 and “Connecting to the Servers” on page 3-38. . If one or more servers are configured to autoconnect. 3-4 24-10248-56 Rev. displaying the User login dialog box. see “Limiting Login Attempts” on page 245. If no server is configured to autoconnect. you will be logged on to SiteManager and connected to the server(s). 2. right-click on the server name and select Connect. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. NOTE Failed login attempts due to an incorrect username or password may lock you out from the SiteManager software for a predetermined amount of time. the instruction steps may vary slightly.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE The following instructions were documented using the default Windows® Start menu. select Start>All Programs>JCI>SiteManager. as long as the server user name and password have been saved and the Password check box has been selected on the Server window (see page 3-21). From the Microsoft® Windows desktop. Inc. Enter your SiteManager Login name and Password. If the server(s) user name and password have not been saved (the Password check box in the Server window is not selected). 4. Click OK.

audio and talk channels. 6. auxiliaries. Enter your DVN server (RemoteControl) Login name and Password. maps. Inc. 3-5 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click OK. You will be connected to the server and will have rights to the DVN server resources that have been assigned to you in your DVN server (RemoteControl) user account. groups. Using the Main Screen The SiteManager Main screen allows you to access all the resources (including servers. cameras.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 5. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Main screen can be split into the following:            Menu bar Toolbar Tabs Search box Hierarchy window Monitors drop-down list Monitor panel Monitor panel playback commands Log window tabs Virtual video desktop Camera video screen 24-10248-56 Rev. Repeat the same steps for each server. alarms. See the following figure for an overview of the SiteManager Main screen. Inc. see “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20. and views) and their functions. If more than one server has been configured to autoconnect. NOTE For additional information about editing the server and saving the server user name and password. a Connecting to server window appears for each of the servers that have been configured to autoconnect. as well as all windows and toolbars discussed in this chapter.

See “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102 for detailed information. disconnections. tasks performed. and system errors. In addition. camera. logouts. system connections. performed setup changes. maps or views. Inc. . map. Displays all system events. and their available resources are displayed in this window when the corresponding tab is selected. Allows you to search for a particular resource. Individual video footage is displayed on the screen along with all the playback commands. logins. groups. All servers. displays alarm notifications and video export tasks. Inc. Virtual video desktop Hierarchy window When selected. and/or monitor screens are displayed on this desktop. Camera video screen Search box System log 3-6 24-10248-56 Rev.SiteManager System log Status bar VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual   Toolbar Menu bar Tabs Virtual video desktop Search box Hierarchy window Camera video screen Monitors drop-down list Monitor panel Monitor panel playback commands Log window tabs Status bar System log Buttons and Features The following features are available on the SiteManager Main screen. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

edit group. as well as various administrative functions relating to user accounts. edit map. Inc. from the menu bar. show resource. Server Group Map View Monitor Resource Tools Window 24-10248-56 Rev. delete group. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. blank. save. add resource. show/hide. change password. disconnect. Provides access to server functions such as new server. disconnect. show. move top left. and the VisionWeb ActiveX® Manager. connect. edit resource. autoconnect. autoconnect. turn off. quality. Provides access to video window functions present in the toolbar as well as Show log window. To show the status bar. edit view. show camera. and send to monitor (for 2D maps only). connect. 3-7 . Provides access to group functions such as new group. delete monitor. show. disconnect. the Log Explorer window. and send to monitor. hide. disconnect. autoconnect. autodisplay. Menu Bar User Provides access to user functions such as login. set priority. Provides access to map functions such as new map. log out. Also allows you to start desktop recording. setup. delete map. and synchronize the system configuration. disconnect. and autodisplay • DVN 100-NET monitors – New monitor. add resources. new 3D map. Remember window positions. full screen. add resource. show/hide. edit layouts. autoconnect. hide. disconnect all. the Options window. and import and export server. select Window>Show statusbar. and autodisplay. delete resource. autodisplay. quality. Provides access to view functions such as new view. autodisplay.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Status bar SiteManager Displays the details of the most recent task performed. full interface. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Provides access to the Events Configuration window. Provides access to monitor functions such as: • VGA monitor – Edit monitor. delete and edit server. connect. rotate. and send to monitor. and Show status bar. layout. edit monitor. connect. and autoconnect • Monitor Groups – New monitor group Provides access to resource functions such as turn on. connect. Inc. setup monitor. See “VisionWeb ActiveX Manager” on page 3-266 for detailed information. delete view. Show monitors panel.

Inc. Displays maps configured in SiteManager and their resources. Allows you to add a new auxiliary. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-8 24-10248-56 Rev. Displays view(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras. 2x and 4x selection. Displays four camera video screens on each row. monitors and/or server interfaces are also present. maps. Arranges currently displayed camera video screens on top of one another (that is. group. The number of camera video windows in each row is determined by the 1x. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Displays one camera video screen on each row. Toolbar New server/group/ view/map/3D map/ monitor Allows you to add a server. Add camera Add aux Add alarm Tile Cascade 1x 2x 4x Bring cameras to front Bring maps to front Bring views to front Bring server interfaces to front Tabs Servers Groups Maps Views Displays servers configured in SiteManager and their resources. Displays two camera video screens on each row. in a cascade arrangement). views. monitors and/or server interfaces are also present. Inc. Once you have selected which resource you wish to add. Displays map(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras. Arranges currently displayed camera video screens in rows and columns. monitors and/or server interfaces are also present. maps. Displays views configured in SiteManager. Displays camera(s) as the top layer on the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when maps. views. views and/or monitors are also present. Displays server interface(s) at the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras. Allows you to add a new camera. Displays groups configured in SiteManager and their resources. 3D map.SiteManager Help VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Provides online user documentation and SiteManager version information. Allows you to add a new alarm. the corresponding hierarchy appears in the hierarchy window. view. . or monitor to the existing configuration. map.

The Alarms Management panel information is deleted when you log out and close the SiteManager application. Server alert Allows you display the Server Alert panel which logs information about all servers that have been configured to perform server status checks. views. Allows you to use standard playback commands for individual monitors and monitor groups. Inc. See “Managing Alarm Events” on page 3-80 for detailed information. Alarms Allows you to display the Alarms Management panel. For detailed information. Allows you to select which monitors you wish to work with – individual or monitor groups. or monitors and their available resources are displayed in this window when you select the corresponding tab. All servers. The Video Export panel information is deleted when you log out and close the SiteManager application. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. see “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122 and “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190. maps. Inc. Displays the Monitor panel drop-down selection. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-9 . Allows you to work with monitors and monitor groups. Video Export Allows you to display the Video Export panel. which lists the following: • System events • Tasks performed • Performed setup changes • System connections • Logins and logouts • Disconnections • System errors The system log is deleted only when you close the SiteManager application. 24-10248-56 Rev. groups. See “Configuring Regular Server Status Checks” on page 3-253 for detailed information.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Monitors SiteManager Displays monitors physically connected to and/or configured on the SiteManager client. Search box Hierarchy window Monitors drop-down list Monitor panel Monitor panel playback commands Log Window Tabs Log actions Allows you to view the system log. Allows you to search for a particular resource.

Saving the SiteManager Configuration The SiteManager configuration is saved by default every time you close the application. To log out of SiteManager and log on a different user. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. from the menu bar. if you wish to save the configuration changes without closing SiteManager. • • NOTE To use any of the options under Resource in the menu bar. and enter their user name and password. 2. . and then select the appropriate option under Resource in the menu bar. perform the following procedure. When you select the Video Export tab (or a video clip is being exported). Inc. Inc. However. NOTE See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for detailed information about the user options and types. The new user needs to select User>Login from the menu bar. When you select the Server alert tab (or an error is detected during a server status check). select User>Save configuration now. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the Log window displays the system log. When you select the Log actions tab. 3-10 24-10248-56 Rev. select User>Logout. The Logging out window appears and you are logged out of SiteManager. Logging Out of SiteManager You may exit SiteManager or log on as a different user.  To log out of SiteManager: 1.SiteManager System log VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual • • When you select the Alarms tab (or an alarm is triggered). 2. Once you have performed any configuration changes. The configuration is saved. the system log displays the Alarms Management panel. the Log window displays the Server Alert panel. the system log displays the Video Export panel.  To save the SiteManager configuration: 1. you must always first select the required resource in the hierarchy window by selecting the Plus sign (+) in front of the server to display available resources.

See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for details about user options and types. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. From the menu bar. which are part of the SiteManager configuration. select User>Administrator. refer to the following manuals:    DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual NOTE The administrator's user name (“admin”) cannot be changed. Connection to the servers and encoders. © 2011 Johnson Controls. to connect to a DVN server and DVN 100-NET encoder included in the SiteManager configuration and to use their resources. Inc. and/or the DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual. and DVN 100-NET encoder. is still controlled by the server connection user name and password specified at the servers and encoders respectively. USER MANAGEMENT To access SiteManager and use its resources. the “admin” account remains the only account with access to all SiteManager features. Inc.  To edit the “admin” account: 1. Unlike for DVN servers and DVN 100-NET encoders. 24-10248-56 Rev. For detailed information about creating user accounts on the server. However. click the X button in the top right-hand corner of the monitor screen. The Configuration window appears and you are exited from SiteManager. To exit SiteManager. See “Related Documentation” on page 1-4. you must have an account created on the DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 servers. Editing the Admin Account The admin user name and password defined in SiteManager can only be used to log into SiteManager and access the SiteManager resources. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. the administrator must create user accounts in SiteManager. 3-11 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 3. In addition. For detailed information about creating user accounts on the server. there may be more than one administrator in SiteManager.

3-12 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. (Optional) Enter the administrator’s full name in the Full name text box. you do not have the proper rights to edit the admin account. you may use the same password as the one used for RemoteControl. NOTE The admin account has rights to perform all functions. 4.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Only the administrator(s) and any user granted the right to edit accounts can edit the admin account. 2. select admin and click OK. select User>Change Password. If the Edit User option is disabled (grayed out). Click OK. The Edit user account dialog appears. 6. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13. From the menu bar. . Inc. In addition. 3. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Enter the preferred password. Changing the Administrator Password  To change the administrator password: 1. The admin User account dialog appears. you do not have the proper rights to edit the admin account. From the Select User drop-down list. 5. Select Edit User. You are now ready to configure SiteManager and create other user accounts. If you do not see the Administrator option listed under the User menu.

Inc. the user will not be able to enable the desktop screen recorder). but the user will not be able to access any of the features or functions under the Tools menu (that is. the user will not have access to the Events Configuration window. SiteManager 2. For detailed information about creating user accounts on the server. and permission options. The user name and password defined in SiteManager can only be used to log into SiteManager and access its resources. ActiveX Manager. From the menu bar. However. 4. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Selecting the Administrator user type for any other account provides the user with access to all permission options.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Change user password dialog appears. refer to the following manuals: • • • DVN 5000 Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual   You may create multiple administrative accounts. 24-10248-56 Rev. Note the following:  The administrator(s) and any user that has been granted the right to create and/or edit accounts will have access to user accounts. Connection to the servers and encoders which are part of the SiteManager configuration is still controlled by the server connection user name and password specified at the DVN server and DVN 100-NET encoder respectively. Click OK. Creating User Accounts To create SiteManager user accounts. there is only one true administrator in SiteManager (that is. select User>Administrator>New user. 3-13 . type. In addition. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the administrator with the default admin account). 5.  To create a user account: 1. 3. Enter the Old password. Log Explorer window and Options window. you need to define the user name and password. Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field. Enter the New password. Inc. The User account dialog appears.

• • • • If you select User. Assign a password and enter it into the Password field. If you deselect the check box. 2. See Table 3-1 for a description of user permission options. 6. 3-14 24-10248-56 Rev. . the user account can be created. allows the user to log on to SiteManager. If you select Custom. then options 1 and 5 will be enabled. then options 1-9 can be enabled or disabled. VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 3. then options 1-9 will be enabled. 3. 4 and 5 will be enabled. Assign the new user a user name and enter it into the Login field. Define the user type by using the Type drop-down list. Power user or Administrator).SiteManager 2. but the user will be unable to log on to SiteManager. Select the Profile tab. Select the General tab. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 7. If you select Power user. 5. Inc. Inc. NOTE The Enabled check box. (Optional) Enter the user’s full name in the Full name text box. as required. If you select Administrator. then options 1. 4. if selected. SiteManager allows you to custom configure the user account (Custom) or allocate a predefined level of access (User. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

group. 5.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager The account permissions enabled are determined by the user type selected on the General tab. The user has the right to access the administrator user menu and can only delete an account. and monitor. Inc. view. 3. Edit own account Create accounts Delete accounts Edit accounts The user has the right to access the Password window and edit his/her password. map. The user has the right to edit any server. 24-10248-56 Rev. group. Function 9. Inc. and monitor. Account Options 6. Table 3-1: User Permission Options Option Number Option Resource Options 1. 2. Table 3-1 contains a description of each user permission option. and monitor. groups. 4. view. The user has the right to export video footage from camera video screens on the fly. The user has the right to delete any server. maps. Use resources Create resources Delete resources Edit resources Use window recorder The user has the right to utilize any server. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-15 . The user has the right to create servers. and monitors. views. map. group. map. The user has the right to access the administrator user menu and can only create a new account. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 8. 7. The user has the right to access the administrator user menu and can only edit an account. view.

You may also delete a user account if he/she no longer uses SiteManager.  To edit a user account: 1. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for details about user options and types. Editing or Deleting User Accounts You may edit user accounts to alter the user name. or Administrator. If you selected User. 2. NOTE If you select Custom after you have selected any of the other three user types. you may modify the permissions on the Profile tab. From the Select user drop-down list. Inc. 3-16 24-10248-56 Rev. From the menu bar. Inc. you cannot modify the permissions on the Profile tab. © 2011 Johnson Controls. NOTE Any user that has been granted the right to edit and/or delete SiteManager accounts can edit and/or delete any user account. .SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE If you selected the Custom user type. The Edit user account dialog appears. Power user. the custom permissions will be the same as those associated with the user type that was selected last. or to grant and deny certain user permission options. select the user you wish to edit and click OK. regardless of his/her user type. 8. Click OK. Verify that you select the correct options for the user. select User>Administrator>Edit user. password and type. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The User account dialog appears. or Administrator. Inc. select the user you wish to delete and click OK. Click OK. Inc. The Delete user account dialog appears. From the menu bar. From the Select user drop-down list. Click Yes on the Confirm dialog. Edit the fields on the General and Profile tabs. 2. The Change user password dialog appears. 4. From the menu bar. Users that have the Edit own account option enabled may change their own user password. Changing the User Password Administrators may change any user password. you cannot edit the check boxes on the Profile tab. 24-10248-56 Rev. If the user type for the selected user is set to Custom. select User>Change Password. If the user type for the selected user is set to User. 3-17 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Power user. 3. you may edit the check boxes on the Profile tab. as necessary.  To change the user password: 1. SiteManager 3. © 2011 Johnson Controls. select User>Administrator>Delete user.  To delete a user account: 1.

Enter the Old password.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. Server Setup To set up servers. 3-18 24-10248-56 Rev. 5. See “Editing or Deleting User Accounts” on page 3-16. . Click OK. Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field. SERVERS One of many advantages of SiteManager is the ability to simultaneously access full remote control and viewing of facilities for numerous network-connected Johnson Controls DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers. select the Servers tab and then select a server within the hierarchy window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. NOTE A password may also be changed by editing an account and simply typing over the old password in the Password field. 4. edit. and DVN 100-NET encoders. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to have access to all of the functions listed in this section. click the Servers tab and perform one of the following actions:   Right-click on the server in the hierarchy window Click a server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar NOTE To activate Server menu options. Enter the New password. You must be granted the right to create. Inc. 3. use.

if required. Export server Allows you to save a server’s configuration and then import it on a different client or when configuring each user’s resources. Allows you to edit server properties. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Allows you to delete a selected server. Allows you to select the connection quality when connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server. Full interface Quality Autoconnect Autodisplay NOTE Enabling the Autoconnect and Autodisplay functions on multiple SiteManager clients attempting to connect to a large number of cameras (all on the same network) may delay the application during start-up if any connection issues arise during the process. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. without logging on to RemoteControl. Displays the RemoteControl Main screen. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The following functions are available: New server Delete server Edit server Connect / Disconnect Disconnect all Setup server SiteManager Allows you to create a new server. which grants you direct access and full functionality of RemoteControl. Automatically displays all the server’s camera resources. Automatically connects the server. which allows you to change the server setup. Displays the RemoteControl Setup screen. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Allows you to import an exported server on a different client or when configuring each user’s resources. 3-19 . A toggle button that allows you to open/close a client connection to the server. Allows you to disconnect all the currently connected servers. Import server 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc.

a high connection quality setting requires more bandwidth to transmit the images but produces a better quality image than images transmitted with a low connection quality setting. NOTE Image quality is directly related to the available bandwidth. 3-20 24-10248-56 Rev. If you wish to connect to a DVN 100-NET running an older firmware version using SiteManager. Refer to the DVN 5000 and 100-NET Series Software Release Notes for Release 2. Before you import a server. Inc. . 2.7 or earlier. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. and DVN 100-NET encoders. See “Exporting Servers” on page 3-25 for information about exporting servers. In order to access full remote control and viewing functionalities.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Connection Quality See Table 3-2 for an overview of the quality options available when connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server via SiteManager. Usually the administrator creates all the available network servers and encoders. unless you were granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. For example. Description Local Area Network (LAN) T1 / T3 2 x ISDN1 / x DSL2 Modem / ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network Digital Subscriber Line Creating or Importing a New Server SiteManager allows you to simultaneously access numerous Johnson Controls DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers. you must add the servers and encoders to SiteManager. Inc. upgrade the device’s firmware to the latest version available. NOTE SiteManager does not support connecting to a DVN 100-NET running firmware version 2. You can manually create a new server or you can import one that was previously exported. © 2011 Johnson Controls. See also “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on user account configuration. Table 3-2: Connection Quality Options Quality Option Highest High Medium Low 1.10 for upgrade instructions. you must first export the server(s).

maps. All users connecting to the server have identical rights to the server resources. Click the Servers tab. © 2011 Johnson Controls. groups. as does the user whose user name and password have been saved. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click the hierarchy window and click New server Click the New server icon in the toolbar Select Server>New server from the menu bar The Server window appears. 24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE If you have saved the user name and password of a user with more permissions (for example. Inc. verify the Password check box is selected. are determined by the user’s account configuration in SiteManager. 2. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. and the user name and password you specify must be configured as such on the server. Rights to SiteManager resources (servers. so you must have an account on the server. 3. 3-21 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To manually create a new server: SiteManager 1. 4. These details are used to establish a connection between the SiteManager client and the DVN server. Enter the following: • • • Server name Quality (connection) Type of server See “Servers” on page 3-18 for detailed information on connection quality. the user with less permissions will have the same rights to the server resources as does the administrator. To save the user name and password. however. and views). Enter the Username and Password. the administrator) and a user with less permissions is connecting to the server. Inc. To select the New server option.

he will be connected to the server and only have rights to those server resources as specified in his server (RemoteControl) user account and only have rights to SiteManager resources (servers. If you want each user to connect to the server/encoder without the need to enter his/her SiteManager user name and password. maps. VPN connection. however. Go to step 13. ISDN connection. When the user attempts to connect to the server. If you do not wish to save the user name and password.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 5. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If the SiteManager client will connect to the server via a modem connection. click Remote Access. When users attempt to connect to the server. or a serial. groups. they will be asked for their own user name and password. parallel or infrared port. Rights to SiteManager resources (servers. 8. 7. 6. and views). . views. click Network and enter the server’s IP address in the Address field. they will be connected to the server and only have rights to those server resources as specified in their server (RemoteControl) user account. NOTE The user’s SiteManager login name and password must be identical to the server login name and password. are determined by the user’s account configuration in SiteManager. maps. deselect the Password check box. The remote access toolbar appears on the Server window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. select the Login to server using current login credentials check box. clients and monitors) according to the user’s SiteManager account. Once they enter their (server) user name and password. If the SiteManager client will connect to the server via a LAN connection. Inc. groups. 3-22 24-10248-56 Rev.

To create a VPN connection. Click Finish. 12. select the Expand tree when connected check box. © 2011 Johnson Controls. From the Connection drop-down list. select Connect to the network via broadband and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. Inc. Click New. To create a broadband connection. Repeat the previous steps to create additional servers/encoders. The Network Connection Wizard window appears. 11. select the connection you wish to use for the selected server. 13. 3-23 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 9. 15. To create a direct port connection. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. Right click on the hierarchy window and select Import server. select Dial-up to private network and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. To create a dial-up connection. select Connect directly to another computer and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings. 14.  To import a server: 1. The new server appears in the hierarchy window. To view the server resources at the time of connection. Select the Servers tab. 2. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. SiteManager 10. or select Server>Import server from the menu bar. Click OK. The Server window appears and the created connection is included in the Connection drop-down list. select Connect to a private network through the Internet and follow the on screen prompts to configure the connection settings.

5. VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 3. Select the required server configuration file and click Open. 4. as needed. Inc. Edit the server’s configuration settings.SiteManager The Open dialog box appears. NOTE The user name and password are not imported. Inc. 3-24 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. . The selected server appears on the Servers hierarchy tab. See the server edit sections of this manual for assistance. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Navigate to the correct drive and folder where the server configuration file is located.

In the hierarchy window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Exporting Servers SiteManager allows you to export any server configuration file. 6. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Select the Servers tab. See also “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. Navigate to the drive and folder where you wish to save the server configuration file. Inc. The Save As dialog box appears. 3-25 . 24-10248-56 Rev. 3. Right-click over the server you wish to export and select Export server or select Server>Export server from the menu bar. 5. You can then import these files when creating resources for different users or when configuring multiple SiteManager clients. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 4. Inc. SiteManager saves the configuration file and the system log states that the file has been saved. Click Save. select the server you wish to export.  To export a server: 1. See “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20 for information about exporting a server. 2. NOTE The user name and password are not imported.

3-26 24-10248-56 Rev. Usually. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. All available servers are displayed in the hierarchy window.  To edit a server network connection: 1. IMPORTANT Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure. Right-click the desired Server icon or select the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. . the administrator edits all the available network servers. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2. unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on user account configuration.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Editing Server Network Connections You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration as necessary to change the IP address of a server’s network connection. It does not affect the server itself in any way. The Server menu appears. Inc. Editing a server’s IP address only applies to the SiteManager application. Click the Servers tab.

24-10248-56 Rev. Editing a server’s dial-up connection only applies to the SiteManager application. the administrator edits all the available network servers. If the client uses a dial-up connection to connect to the server. Click Edit server. Editing Server Dial-Up Connections You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. Refer to one of the software installation and configuration manuals listed in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4 for information on user account configuration. 3. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. It does not affect the server itself in any way. 4. 3-27 . Enter/change the server’s IP address in the Address field. The Server window appears.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder. editing the server’s dial-up connection settings allows you to configure the connection to meet your exact requirements. Click OK. 5. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Usually. the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. The Server window closes and the new IP address is applied. IMPORTANT Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure. Inc.

Click Edit server. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. The Server window appears. The server menu appears. 3. 3-28 24-10248-56 Rev. Click the Servers tab. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To edit a server dial-up connection: 1. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. 2. All available servers appears in the hierarchy window. the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder.

See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. 5. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied. Click OK. Editing Server VPN Connections You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. Inc. If the client uses a VPN connection to connect to the server. unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Usually. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. 24-10248-56 Rev. 6. Editing a server’s VPN connection only applies to the SiteManager application. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Once you have completed editing the selected dial-up connection. 3-29 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. IMPORTANT Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure. Inc. The Server window appears. as needed. the administrator edits all the available network servers. 7. click OK on the Dial-up Connection window. It does not affect the server itself in any way. The Dial-up Connection window (General tab) appears. Configure the connection settings. editing the server’s VPN connection settings allows you to configure the connection to meet your exact requirements.

Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click the Servers tab. The server menu appears. 2.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To edit a server VPN connection: 1. Inc. The Server window appears. . the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click Edit server. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window. 3. 3-30 24-10248-56 Rev. If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the administrator edits all available network servers. 7. unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. 3-31 . The Server window appears. 5. as needed. 6. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on user account configuration. Inc. Editing Server Direct Connections You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Once you have completed editing the selected VPN connection.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. editing the server’s direct connection settings allows you to configure the connection to meet your exact requirements. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied. Click OK. The Virtual Private Connection window (General tab) appears. If the client uses a direct connection to connect to the server. 24-10248-56 Rev. Configure the connection settings. click OK on the Virtual Private Connection window. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. Usually.

. the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. It does not affect the server itself in any way. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. IMPORTANT Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. 3-32 24-10248-56 Rev. 3. The server menu appears.  To edit a server direct connection: 1. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. The Server window appears. Click the Servers tab. If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder. 2.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Editing a server’s direct connection only applies to the SiteManager application. Click Edit server.

5. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. The Direct Connection window (General tab) appears. Click OK. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied. Usually. unless you were granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. the administrator edits all the available network servers. click OK on the Direct Connection window. If a client uses a broadband connection to connect to the server.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. 6. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Inc. Configure the connection settings. Editing a Server Broadband Connection You may edit each server included in a SiteManager configuration. 3-33 . The Server window appears. 7. It does not affect the server itself in any way. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Editing a server’s broadband connection only applies to the SiteManager application. as necessary. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. editing the server’s broadband connection settings allows you to configure the connection so that it meets your exact requirements. 24-10248-56 Rev. Once you have completed editing the selected direct connection.

The server menu appears. . All available servers appear in the hierarchy window. The Server window appears. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture.  To edit a server broadband connection: 1. If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual IMPORTANT Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure. Inc. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3. Inc. 2. Click the Servers tab. Click Edit server. 3-34 24-10248-56 Rev.

Once you have completed editing the selected direct connection. 5. The Server window closes and the connection settings are applied. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. Renaming or Deleting Server Connections Sometimes you may want to rename or completely remove a server’s remote access connection. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click Edit in the remote access toolbar. The Server window appears. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for information on configuring user accounts. unless you were granted the right to edit and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. Inc. 3-35 . © 2011 Johnson Controls. 6. click OK on the Broadband Connection window. 7. as necessary. Configure the connection settings.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. the administrator renames or deletes available network servers. Click OK. Usually. The Broadband Connection window (General tab) appears.

The server menu appears. It does not affect the server itself in any way. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. Click the Servers tab. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window. . If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder. 2.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Renaming or deleting a server’s connection only applies to the SiteManager application. Inc. IMPORTANT Verify that the server is not connected before performing the following procedure. 3-36 24-10248-56 Rev.  To rename or delete a server connection: 1. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar.

Enter the preferred connection name. The Server window closes and all changes are applied. 5. 7. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Rename window appears. 6. 8. To change the name of a remote access connection. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. Click Yes. 3-37 . Click OK. The Confirm window appears. The selected connection is renamed and the Server window appears. click Delete in the remote access toolbar. Inc. Click Edit server. 24-10248-56 Rev. The selected connection is deleted and the Server window appears. SiteManager 4. Click OK.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 3. The Server window appears. click Rename in the remote access toolbar. To remove a remote access connection.

If the user name and password have been saved (the password check box in the Server window is selected). you must connect to the servers in order to access the server’s resources and thus gain full functionality of SiteManager. A Plus (+) sign will be displayed in front of the server name in the hierarchy window. 3.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Connecting to the Servers Once you add the servers to the configuration. The server menu appears. If you selected a DVN 100-NET encoder. . Click Connect. Inc. You may also simply double-click the server in the hierarchy window to connect. 4. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. All the available servers appear in the hierarchy window. 2. Click the Servers tab. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. the menu options are different than those shown in the previous screen capture. 3-38 24-10248-56 Rev. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. the SiteManager client will be connected to the server with the rights of the user whose name and password have been saved.  To connect to the server: 1.

A Plus (+) sign will be displayed in front of the server name in the hierarchy window. 6. 24-10248-56 Rev. Enter your DVN server (RemoteControl) Login name and Password. the Connecting to server window appears. then the SiteManager client will be connected to the server with the rights of the user currently logged into SiteManager. 5. Inc. If the connection with the server is created using the credentials of the user currently logged into SiteManager. Inc. 7. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager You may need to use the scroll bar at the bottom of the hierarchy window to display the Plus sign (+). If the server’s user name and password have not been saved (the password check box in the Server window is not selected). 3-39 . Click OK. You will be connected to the server and a Plus (+) sign will be displayed in front of the server name in the hierarchy window.

click the Plus (+) sign or double-click the server in the hierarchy window. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The server menu appears. click Autoconnect again. NOTE By selecting the Autoconnect option instead. This will also occur upon all subsequent logins to SiteManager.  To disconnect from a server: 1. 3. 3-40 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. To disconnect from all currently connected servers.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 8. . the server will be automatically connected. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Repeat the previous steps for each server. The Plus (+) sign is now a Minus (-) sign and all the server’s resources are displayed in the hierarchy window. To disable this feature. select Disconnect all. 2. Click Disconnect. You will be disconnected from the server. 9. To display the server’s resources.

See “Servers” on page 3-18 for detailed information on connection quality. In order to edit a server.  To delete a server: 1. at any point by following a few simple steps. click Quality in the Server menu and select one of the four options. username. Inc. 3. you must be granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration. 3-41 . see the following:      “Editing Server Network Connections” on page 3-26 “Editing Server Dial-Up Connections” on page 3-27 “Editing Server VPN Connections” on page 3-29 “Editing Server Direct Connections” on page 3-31 “Editing a Server Broadband Connection” on page 3-33  To edit server properties: 1. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. To edit the connection quality. such as name.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Editing Server Properties You may edit server properties. Click OK. and type. To edit a server’s network or remote access connection. See also “Server Setup and Full Interface” on page 3-42 for information about the server alarm functions and “Working with Server Resources” on page 3-46 for information about the Reset names function. password. Click the Servers tab. perform one of the following actions: • • Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server Click the server in the hierarchy window and from the menu bar select Server>Edit server 2. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. Click the Servers tab. The new server’s properties are applied. All available servers appear in the hierarchy window. connection quality. To select the Edit server option. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Change the server’s properties as required. 4.

The number and type of server configuration changes you may perform in the Setup screen are determined by the rights you have been granted based upon your RemoteControl user account configuration. DVN 100-NET encoders can be configured using the SiteManager Server Setup feature. Click Delete server. and DVN 100-NET video from a single SiteManager at the same time. Click the Servers tab. To select the Setup server option: • • Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Setup server or Click the server in the hierarchy window. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. 4. the Full Interface feature is not supported. You can also view DVN 5000. Server Setup and Full Interface SiteManager allows you to directly access RemoteControl for DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers without the need to log off SiteManager and log on to the server’s interface separately. Note the following:  To access a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 server’s setup screen and/or full interface. as well as full RemoteControl functionality for DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers. click Yes to delete the server from the configuration. DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 RemoteControl applications must be installed on the SiteManager client. The server menu appears. Inc.    To use the Server Setup feature: 1. the RemoteControl Setup screen appears. 3. and from the menu bar select Server>Setup server. It allows you direct control of the selected server’s configuration. 3-42 24-10248-56 Rev. DVN 3000. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server. When the Confirmation box appears. Right-click the desired Server icon or click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server from the menu bar. For detailed information about installing RemoteControl. please refer to the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual or the DVN 3000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. however.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. If connecting to a DVN 100-NET encoder. as required. DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual 3-43 . To configure the DVN 100-NET. Inc. Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager You may need to wait a few moments while SiteManager loads the selected server’s interface. the Login screen appears. For information on configuring the server. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. enter your User name and Password and click OK. The DVN 100-NET Current Setup page appears. 2. refer to one of the following manuals: • • 24-10248-56 Rev. Change the server configuration.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Use the DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 RemoteControl application.SiteManager • VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual DVN 100-NET Series Installation and Operation Manual  To use the Full Interface feature: 1. and from the menu bar select Server>Full interface. Log on to the server’s software. You may need to wait a few moments while SiteManager loads the remote server control. Server Resources Server resources may include up to:     32 cameras 16 auxiliaries 128 alarms 32 mono audio channels or 16 stereo audio channels (listen) 3-44 24-10248-56 Rev. To select the Full interface option: • • Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Full interface or Click the server in the hierarchy window. 2. 3. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Inc. the RemoteControl Main screen appears. If connecting to a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server. as required. Click the Servers tab. Refer to one of the software user manuals listed in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4 for information on RemoteControl.

3-45 . Please refer to DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost mode. Allows you to adjust the volume of the audio and talk channels. Inc. Server Resource Menu Options The functions available for managing server resources are: Show/Hide A toggle button that allows you to display/remove camera video screens on/from the virtual video desktop. Allows you to activate the priority boost mode and increase a camera’s FPS (Frames per second) rate on demand. auxiliaries. and alarms and select their unique IDs. Inc. The server resources can only be used or edited. which allows you to assign names to cameras. Displays the Resource Properties window. Turn on/Turn off Edit resource Set priority Send to monitor Disconnect Allows you to disconnect the resource.100% 24-10248-56 Rev. A toggle button that allows you to activate/deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. Allows you to display the selected camera on a VGA or network (DVN 100-NET) monitor.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 1 talk channel (talk back) SiteManager  Individual server hierarchies are automatically configured by SiteManager based on the resources available at the server and are displayed in the hierarchy window. They cannot be created or deleted. Mute 0% . You can only send a camera to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. You must be granted the right to edit resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. A DVN 3000 camera can only be sent to a VGA monitor. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. This feature only applies to cameras that are connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Disconnecting one resource automatically disconnects the entire server to which the resource is connected. Allows you to mute an audio channel. See “Alarm Manager” on page 3-56 for detailed information about configuring alarms and auxiliaries.

you must first select a resource. NOTE If a server resource (camera. Display the available resources by clicking the Plus sign (+) in front of the resource type or by double-clicking on the resource in the hierarchy window. Inc.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Resource Status The hierarchy window resource icons display changes according to whether the resource is connected (active) or disconnected (inactive). the resource hierarchy will not display the resource (e. or audio channel) is disabled at the server (e. alarm. the DVN 5000 will not display Camera 5). 3-46 24-10248-56 Rev.g. Table 3-3: Resource Icons Resource Camera – Fixed Camera – Dome Aux Alarm Audio Talk N/A N/A N/A N/A Connected or Active Disconnected or Inactive Disconnected at the Server Working with Server Resources To work with resource menu options. See Table 3-3.g. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Camera 5 input does not have a camera connected on DVN 5000 server). the resource hierarchy will display the camera with a block (e. The available resources appear in the hierarchy window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. . If a camera or dome is disconnected at the server (e.g. You must be granted the right to use and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration to work with server resources. Camera 5 is not enabled on a DVN 5000 server).  To activate and work with a resource: 1.g. dome. the DVN 5000 will display Camera 5 with a block). aux. Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

2. To access the Resource menu, right-click a Resource icon, or click the resource in the hierarchy window and select Resource from the menu bar. 3. Select the desired resource type. The corresponding resource menu appears. 4. Select and click the required option. See the following definitions:
Show

The selected camera is displayed in its individual camera video screen.

Hide Connect (Camera) Disconnect (Camera)

The selected camera’s video screen is no longer displayed. SiteManager establishes a connection with the camera’s server. SiteManager disconnects from the camera’s server.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-47

SiteManager
Edit resource (Camera)

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Resource Properties window appears.

Enter the preferred camera name in the Name text box and click OK. The name and I.D. appear in the server hierarchy window. The Unique ID field is not used.
Set priority

This feature allows you to increase a camera’s FPS rate on demand. When Set priority is selected, the priority boost will be activated for the selected camera. The priority boost will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. Refer to DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost.

Send to monitor

The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera. If you select to display the camera on a VGA monitor, the selected camera will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you close/blank the monitor. You can only send a camera to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode.

Turn on Turn off Connect (Alarm or Aux) Disconnect (Alarm or Aux) Edit resource (Alarm)

The selected aux or alarm will be activated. The selected aux or alarm will be deactivated. SiteManager will establish a connection with the alarm’s or aux’s server. SiteManager will disconnect from the alarm’s or aux’s server.

The Resource Properties window appears.

3-48

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

Enter the preferred alarm name in the Name text box and click OK. The name and I.D. appear in the server hierarchy window. The Unique ID field is not used.
Edit resource (Aux)

The Resource Properties window appears.

Enter the preferred aux name in the Name text box and click OK. The name and I.D. appear in the server hierarchy window. The Unique ID field is not used.
Mute (Audio Channel) 0% 100% (Audio or Talk Channel)

The audio channel will be muted.

The audio channel or talk channel volume will be adjusted to match the selection.

5. You may also assign a resource name by double-clicking on the resource name in the hierarchy window and typing in the preferred name.

NOTE
When double-clicking on the resource name, the second click needs to be slightly delayed.

Camera Name Reset
If you wish to have identical camera names as specified on the corresponding server, you may use the name reset function. This is a camera only function. To reset camera names, you must be granted the right to create and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-49

SiteManager  To assign server camera names:

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

1. Click the Servers tab. To select the Edit server option: • • Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server or Click the server in the hierarchy window and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar.

The Server window appears.

2. Click Reset names. The Confirm dialog box appears.

3. Click Yes. The camera names are changed to match the camera names defined on the selected server. 4. Click OK. The Server window closes.

Other Information (Cameras)
You may also display a camera by simply:
  

Double-clicking on the camera in the hierarchy window, or Clicking and dragging the desired camera to the virtual video desktop, or Selecting the Autodisplay option in the Server menu

For additional information, see “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102 and “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242.

Other Information (Audio)
To enable an audio channel and be able to listen to live audio, the corresponding camera must first be displayed in its camera video screen and/or view. You may also

3-50

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

talk back to the server by enabling the Talk channel in the hierarchy window and speaking into the microphone connected to the client.

Working with Camera Dome Internal Auxiliaries
Certain camera domes may have internal auxiliary switches which can be used to perform camera dome tasks such as wash and wipe. Once these auxiliaries are physically configured at the camera dome, you can turn them on or off to perform the configured camera dome functions. Note the following:
 

Internal auxiliaries are only available for certain camera domes. Ensure that the internal auxiliary switches are configured correctly prior to commencing the instructions in this section. You may need to consult the camera dome’s installation guide to successfully utilize internal dome auxiliaries. The total number of available internal auxiliaries are determined by the camera dome type, and the available functions are determined by the physical camera dome configuration. You must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration to work with server resources.

 To utilize camera dome auxiliary outputs: 1. Click the Servers tab. 2. To display the available server resources, click the Plus (+) sign in front of the required Server icon or double-click on the required Server icon in the hierarchy window. 3. To display the available cameras, click the Plus (+) sign in front of the Camera icon or double-click on the required Server icon in the hierarchy window. Camera domes with available internal auxiliary switches have a Plus (+) sign in front of the Camera dome icon. 4. To display the available camera dome internal auxiliaries, click the Plus (+) sign in front of the required Camera dome icon or double-click on the required Camera dome icon in the hierarchy window.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-51

SiteManager

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

5. You may perform the following actions: • • To turn on an auxiliary, double-click an Auxiliary icon, or right-click on the icon and select Turn on from the Auxiliary Resource menu. To turn off an auxiliary, double-click an activated Auxiliary icon, or right-click on an activated Auxiliary icon and select Turn off from the Auxiliary Resource menu. To edit the auxiliary name, right-click on an Auxiliary icon and click Edit resource. On the Resource Properties dialog box, enter the preferred aux name in the Name field. Click OK.

NOTE
The Unique ID field is not used. Also, disconnecting an auxiliary results in SiteManager disconnecting the auxiliary from the server to which it is connected.

Configuring Dome Control Settings
If camera domes are used over limited bandwidth, the refresh rate is often poor when high quality images are streamed in real time. To improve the refresh rate over limited bandwidth, enable the dome control feature, which dynamically switches to a more suitable encoder for real-time transmission during PTZ control. When a camera dome is idle, high quality images will be transmitted, and as soon as the dome is moved, lower quality images will be transmitted for the duration of PTZ control.

NOTE
This feature is only functional for camera domes connected to DVN 5000 servers.

 To configure dome control settings for DVN 5000 servers: 1. Click the Servers tab.

3-52

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

or select the server in the hierarchy window and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar. 7. Right-click on the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server. A mute function is also available in individual camera video screens and the audio resource menus for cameras that have an enabled audio channel. and select the quality that will be used when a dome is controlled on the selected server. The mute button does not apply to the bidirectional Talk channel. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click OK.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 2. Click the Domes controls tab. Inc. 3. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Server dialog box appears. 24-10248-56 Rev. AUDIO CHANNELS SiteManager provides you with access to all the enabled audio channels on any Johnson Controls DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series server. and DVN 100-NET encoder included in a SiteManager configuration. select the resolution that will be used when a dome is controlled on the selected server. From the Resolution drop-down list. Inc. 4. See “Server Resources” on page 3-44 and “Working with Server Resources” on page 3-46 for additional information. Select the Use custom image quality check box. 3-53 . Audio channels are represented as server resources and can be accessed in the hierarchy window when server resources are displayed. 6. A single bidirectional audio channel (Talk) is also provided. 5. From the Quality drop-down list. allowing you to speak back to the server.

Also. of Audio Channels Mono DVN 3000 DVN 5000 DVN 100-NET 0 Up to 32 2 Stereo 1 (or up to 4 for DVN 3000-NET) Up to 16 1 Live Yes Yes Yes Playback Yes Yes No Talk Back Yes Yes No  To listen to live or recorded audio: 1. right-click on it and select the required volume from the audio resource menu. To enable the Talk channel. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. The available audio channels appear in the hierarchy window. click the Plus sign next to Audio channels or double-click the Audio channels icon in the hierarchy window.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-4: Audio Specification Audio Server Type No. Inc. double-click the desired Talk Channel icon. To display the server’s resources. The Talk channel becomes enabled and you can talk back to the server by speaking into the microphone connected to your PC. NOTE Only audio channels configured on the server are shown in the hierarchy. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. To talk back to the server. click the Plus sign next to Talk channels or double-click the Talk channels icon in the hierarchy window. click the Plus sign (+) or double-click the server in the hierarchy window. The available Talk channel appears in the hierarchy window. the audio channel(s) associated with the displayed camera(s) will be enabled and audio will be automatically 3-54 24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE You can use the Talk channel regardless of what it displayed on your virtual video desktop. Display the camera video screen whose audio you wish to listen to and/or the view which contains the camera you wish to listen to. To listen to live and/or recorded audio. if no cameras associated with the audio channels (or views with these cameras selected as masters) are currently displayed on the virtual video desktop. 5. 3. 6. all the audio channels will be off. 2. To adjust the volume of the talk channel. • If you displayed a camera. 4. Click the Servers tab and connect to the required server. . 7.

click the Speaker icon again. to adjust the audio channels volume. all the audio functions are performed manually on the monitor or monitor speakers. The audio will not be audible. To mute the audio channel by using the audio channel menu. You can also listen to live and recorded audio on monitors connected to the SiteManager client. 3-55 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. To listen to audio again. If the audio channel is not muted or switched off. see “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 and “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184. none of the audio channels will be enabled. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The audio will not be audible. See “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 for additional information. If you displayed a view whose current master camera does not have any audio channels associated with it. Inc. the audio will be automatically audible during playback. start either playback on the camera video screen or synchronized multiple camera playback in a view with the camera you wish to listen to selected as the master. 11. For details about playing back. For monitors. • If you displayed a view whose current master camera has audio channels associated with it. the audio channel(s) associated with the master camera will be enabled and audio will be automatically audible if the master camera currently contains live audio and your speakers are connected correctly. Click Mute. • 8. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager audible if you are displaying a camera which currently contains live audio and your speakers are connected correctly. 10. right-click on the Audio channel in the hierarchy window. Once you are either displaying a camera video screen or view with the required camera as the master. Select a different master camera. The audio channel menu appears. right-click the required audio channel in the hierarchy window and select the required volume from the audio resource menu or adjust the volume of your speakers manually. click the Speaker icon on the camera video screen or in the hierarchy window. To mute the audio channel on the camera video screen. 9. To listen to recorded audio.

SiteManager will attempt to connect to the server using the network interface with the highest priority. and so on. © 2011 Johnson Controls. it will attempt to establish a connection through the next network interface provided in the server profile. .SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors” on page 3-218 for information about monitors. Inc. Server Alarm Call Priority SiteManager can be used as the alarm control center for multiple DVN server installations. unless otherwise stated. 3-56 24-10248-56 Rev. The Remote Access is equal to Client Remote Access Connection (modem).wav) for alarm notification. in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4 for detailed information about configuring alarms. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. See “Silencing Server Alarms” on page 3-100 for detailed information. ALARM MANAGER This section provides detailed information about:     Alarms Management of alarms Configuring and managing alarm events Configuring the screen recorder and the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server NOTE In this section. In addition. Alarm call priority will be disabled during alarm silence times for the server. you must be granted the right to create and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration. the term “server” refers to DVN 5000 Series and DVN 3000 Series servers. If the client fails to successfully connect to the server via this connection. you can assign a unique alarm sound to each server included in a SiteManager configuration that can alert the user when any of the server’s alarms are triggered. SiteManager uses standard wave sound files (. Since a SiteManager configuration may consist of numerous servers. Refer to the appropriate DVN manual. such as the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. assigning an individual alarm sound to each server allows you to immediately and audibly identify the server source of the triggered alarm. and DVN 100-NET encoders. In order to configure alarm priority and assign alarm sounds. Alarm resources available within SiteManager are DVN server-defined alarms. the specified SiteManager client will attempt to establish a connection with the server based on the server alarm call priority list. When an alarm is triggered and the server has been configured to notify a SiteManager client.

folder.wav files only. The selected file will be added to the Alarm sound box. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. and from the menu bar select Server>Edit server 2.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To configure alarm call priority: SiteManager 1. click the Alarm call priority tab. Inc.. Click the Servers tab. In the Server window. 24-10248-56 Rev. Click the browse (. Inc.wav files available on the SiteManager client. perform one of the following actions: • • Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server Click the server in the hierarchy window. Click Open. You may need to select the drive and folder in order to access the . 4. The Select an audio file for alarm notification window appears. 3. SiteManager can upload . The Alarm call priority panel appears. and . © 2011 Johnson Controls..) button next to the Alarm sound field.wav file. 3-57 . Select the required directory. To select the Edit server option.

Select the server NIC/modem you wish the client to use first when attempting to establish a connection when an alarm is triggered. When an alarm is triggered. There will only be a message in the Status bar (and the status log if a user is currently logged on to SiteManager) providing the details of the triggered alarm. select the Connect on alarm check box. 9. the next drop-down box in the sequence is enabled. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Each time you select a network interface card. The specified alarm priority will be applied and the Server window will close. . Inc. Repeat the same steps for each NIC and modem as required. See “Managing Alarm Events” on page 3-80 for detailed information about what will occur when an alarm is triggered. Click the first drop-down arrow. 6. See “Configuring Alarm Events” on page 3-64 for additional information about alarm events and alarm notification. and the selected alarm sound notifies the user of the triggered alarm. The top drop-down box has the highest priority (the client will attempt to establish a connection via the specified NIC/modem first) and the bottom drop-down box has the lowest priority (the client will attempt to establish a connection via the specified NIC/modem last). Inc. The Network Interface Card (NIC) list appears.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 5. SiteManager analyzes the alarm call priority list. It then attempts to establish a connection with the server via the NICs/modem as specified in the priority list. Click the next drop-down arrow and select another NIC/modem in order of priority. 8. NOTE If you select not to establish a connection with the server when an Alarm Manager notification is received. 7. 3-58 24-10248-56 Rev. Click OK. none of the configured events will occur. To establish a connection with the server when an Alarm Manager notification is received. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

The Options dialog box appears. you must configure the SMTP server settings. 3.  To configure the SMTP settings: 1. If desktop recording is activated manually. see “Configuring Alarm Events” on page 3-64. For SiteManager to send this automatic E-mail. If the screen camera has been configured as an action for an alarm event and an Alarm Manager 24-10248-56 Rev. enter it in the Default sender field. The administrator can manually activate desktop recording or an alarm event can be configured to automatically turn on the screen camera upon triggering of the event’s alarm. Click Apply or OK. For detailed information on configuring SiteManager with automatic E-mail generation when alarms are triggered. To use the server’s name and password. To use a default sender name. In the Server name field. enter the necessary port number in the Port field. The SMTP settings now allow the SiteManager client to automatically generate and send E-mail messages when alarms are received. Configuring the Screen Recorder SiteManager allows the administrator to monitor any user’s activity on a SiteManager client by recording the SiteManager desktop upon manual activation or in response to a triggered alarm for the duration of the alarm. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. enter the necessary user name and password in the User Name and Password fields respectively. 6. enter the SMTP server name for outgoing messages. Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Configuring the SMTP Server Settings SiteManager events can be configured to automatically send an email when an alarm is triggered and an Alarm Manager notification is received. From the menu bar. If required. Select the SMTP settings tab. 7. 2. 4. select Tools>Options. user activity will be continuously recorded until the administrator manually deactivates desktop recording. 3-59 . © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. 5.

If using multiple monitors.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual notification is received.    To configure the screen recorder: 1. We recommend using the Microsoft MPEG-4 video codec when using the screen recorder. Note the following:  The administrator is the only user who can access the Options window and configure the screen recorder. they should have the same resolution settings for the best screen recording video quality. 3-60 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. . The Options window (Screen recorder tab) appears. Inc.avi format and will be stored in the location as specified by the administrator. The screen camera footage is recorded in the . select Tools>Options. Inc. 2. Click the Screen recorder tab. The screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time. From the menu bar. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Options window (General tab) appears. the screen camera will be automatically turned on and will record all user activity for the duration of the alarm.

The Browse window appears. Inc. From the Video codec drop-down list. 4. The window becomes enabled. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 5. We recommend one of the MPEG4 video codecs. Locate the directory and folder in which you wish to store screen camera footage. Inc. 6. 3-61 . In the Path field. The Browse window closes and the selected path is displayed. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click OK. Select the Screen recorder is enabled check box. select the preferred video compression technique you wish to be applied to the screen camera footage. click the Browse (.. 24-10248-56 Rev.) button..VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 3.

When Alarm Manager receives an alarm notification. such as the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4 for detailed information about alarm configuration. Use the Bitrate scroll bar arrows to select the preferred footage quality. Inc. etc. Also. see “Configuring Alarm Events” on page 3-64 for detailed information about configuring alarm events.. Alarm Manager is automatically installed as part of the SiteManager installation procedure at a client. The screen recorder is now enabled. In some cases. display alarm cameras. Click OK. 10. In order for SiteManager to be notified of an alarm. depending on the event’s configuration). but their state does not change when a user acknowledges the alarm. the DVN servers must have alarms configured for remote client notification. the Alarm Manager icon appears on the client’s taskbar.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 7. Use the Frame rate slide and select the required frame rate (Frames Per Second [FPS]) for the screen camera footage. 8. 9. Alarm Manager is an application that runs in the background listening for alarm messages sent by the DVN servers. Alarm Manager Overview One of the important functions of SiteManager is to act as the alarm control center for multiple DVN server installations. but will not be functional unless the administrator manually activates desktop recording or one or more of the alarm events have been configured to turn on the screen camera when an Alarm Manager notification is received. 3-62 24-10248-56 Rev. Locking of Prime sector or UPS going offline may be used as alarm sources. © 2011 Johnson Controls. sound an alarm. Click Apply. . When a server sends an alarm message and Alarm Manager receives it. You must manually perform the necessary tasks to change server lock or server UPS state/status. See “Recording User’s Desktop Activity” on page 3-244 for detailed information about manual activation of desktop recording. Refer to the appropriate DVN manual. prompt the user to perform certain tasks. All incoming alarms are logged and the user is prompted for an acknowledgement of the incoming alarms. the source of the alarm is not reset. See also “Configuring Alarm Events” on page 3-64 and ensure that the events are configured accordingly. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Once installed. SiteManager is notified of the alarm so that it can notify users and respond (for example. Inc. We recommend the 128 bit rate for MPEG4 video codecs. SiteManager attempts to establish a network connection to the alarmed server and perform an action in response to the alarm. The Options window closes. The screen recorder settings are applied.

The configured alarm event actions (such as displaying of alarmed cameras and recording of user activity. though there are literally hundreds of unique alarm event combinations that can be configured) occur. alarmed cameras).VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Alarm Manager Notification All received Alarm Manager notifications are displayed in the alarms management panel in the system log at the bottom of the Main screen. Remember that the Alarm Manager notification may be accompanied by a number of alarm events and an alarm sound. Inc. When an alarm notification is received:  The Alarms Management panel and the status bar display the name of the triggered alarm. 3-63 . the time of alarm activation. the server to which the triggered alarm is connected. The system log documents all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. Inc. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s desktop start toolbar illuminates. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.     The following screen shows an example of an Alarm Manager notification. The triggered alarm icon is illuminated in the hierarchy window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (that is. 24-10248-56 Rev.

. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Configuring Alarm Events When an alarm is triggered at a DVN server.    In addition. if configured. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). The triggered alarm icon is illuminated in the hierarchy window. the time of alarm occurred. SiteManager can be configured to automatically perform one. the following events occur by default:  The Alarms Management panel and the status bar display the name of the triggered alarm. the server where the alarm was triggered. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. At this point. If Alarm Manager is present on the SiteManager client. a combination. Inc. The system log documents all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. a notification of the triggered alarm will be sent to a SiteManager client (or clients). or all of the following on a per alarm basis:                  Connect to a server Disconnect from a server Disconnect all servers Show all alarmed cameras Show a camera Turn an alarm on Turn an alarm off Turn an aux on Turn an aux off Show a group Show a view Show a view on a monitor Show a map Show a 3D map Show a camera on a monitor Cycle alarmed cameras on a monitor Record user activity (screen cam – enable the screen camera which will record the SiteManager interface and all the tasks performed by the user from the beginning to the end of the alarm notification) 3-64 24-10248-56 Rev. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar illuminates. it will receive the notification and alert SiteManager by passing on the alarm notification.

The SiteManager client may automatically prompt the user to perform particular tasks. There will only be a message in the Status bar (and the status log if a user is currently logged on to SiteManager) providing the details of the 24-10248-56 Rev. As the footage is stored according to the administrator’s configuration.   The ability to uniquely configure automatic alarm events for each alarm provides enormous advantages. The event’s actions may occur only locally or on all SiteManager clients that are sharing the SiteManager configuration. In order for SiteManager to be notified of an alarm. A single event can have multiple actions and may occur only locally or on all SiteManager clients that are sharing the SiteManager configuration. See “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242 for details about displaying the system log and the status bar. verify that the system log and/or status bar are displayed respectively. DVN servers must have alarms configured for remote client notification. all of the user’s activity during the alarm alert can be recorded by the screen camera. Important Notes (Configuring Alarm Events)  If you select not to establish a connection with the server when an Alarm Manager notification is received. such as the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual. The time it would take for the user to access all the required screens and surveillance resources is significantly reduced. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Refer to the appropriate DVN manual. In addition. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time. See “Server Alarm Call Priority” on page 3-56 for detailed information about setting the alarm notification sound. Inc. you must configure each server’s alarm notification. such as the system not relying on the user to remember which tasks must be performed at times of alert and potentially high stress. but instead automatically performs a number of tasks and guides the user through the sequence of events which must occur in order to correctly respond to each alarm. To observe the alarm details in the Alarms Management panel and/or the status log.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Send an e-mail Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off SiteManager    Depending on the alarm event configuration:   The selected alarm sound may become audible for the duration of the alarm. If you wish the alarm alert sound to be audible at the time of alarm notification. The SiteManager client may automatically prompt the user to type in details about their response to the triggered alarm. none of the configured events will occur. in “Related Documentation” on page 1-4 for detailed information about configuring alarms and remote client alarm notification. 3-65 .

when assigning the Show camera on monitor action. If SiteManager is minimized or hidden under a fullscreen view. select Tools>Events configuration. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the operator will not notice the camera call-up if Show Camera is used. or the Show Camera action. 3-66 24-10248-56 Rev. When this action occurs. If a monitor is configured for quad view mode (see “Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227). use either the Show Camera on Monitor alarm action. An alarm should only be used as a source once (do not use the same alarm as a source in two or more events). or quadrant. where the SiteManager application window is unminimized and the monitor does not show a fullscreen view with multiple cameras. Inc. perform the following procedures: • • • • • “Server Alarm Call Priority” on page 3-56 “Configuring the SMTP Server Settings” on page 3-59 “Configuring Alarm Notification Settings” on page 3-79 “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242 “Configuring the Screen Recorder” on page 3-59     How to Configure Alarm Events (Procedure)  To configure alarm events: 1.  Only the administrator can access the Events configuration window and configure the alarm events. where the camera video will occupy the entire screen of an operator’s monitor. you cannot specify a particular region. Inc. See “Server Alarm Call Priority” on page 3-56 for detailed information about connections.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual triggered alarm. To use all of the options outlined in the procedures. From the menu bar. SiteManager will display the selected camera from Region 1 as a full view screen by default. For video call-up purposes. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Events configuration window appears.

select the Local check box. In the Event column. Inc. it will not be displayed in the Server drop-down list. 4. select the server name of the alarm you wish to configure. If you wish the event you are configuring to occur in response to only one of the selected server’s alarms being triggered. If you wish the event you are configuring to occur in response to any of the selected server’s alarms being triggered. All servers currently included in the SiteManager configuration will be listed. select the alarm from the Alarm drop-down list. from the Server drop-down list. 6. In the Source column. If a server exists but has not been configured in SiteManager. and only the selected server’s alarms will be displayed in the Alarm drop-down list.e. An event is added to the Events configuration window. select the alarm you wish to configure.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 2. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-67 . the event will occur on all SiteManager clients sharing the SiteManager configuration). 5. even if other SiteManager clients are sharing the SiteManager configuration. 3. If you wish the event to only occur at the local client. enter the event name. The Alarm drop-down list will be empty if you did not select a server in the Server drop-down list first. Click Add. See “Managing the SiteManager Configuration” on page 3-264 for detailed information about the SiteManager configuration. 7. From the Alarm drop-down list. select Any alarm from the Alarm drop-down list. 8. the local client’s VGA monitors will not be listed in the Monitor drop-down list when the event’s actions are configured. If the Local check box is not enabled (i. Inc. since the VGA monitors are only available on the local client. 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

10. click the Add action button. The Actions dialog box appears. In the Actions column. You can select one of the following actions.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 9. Inc. From the Action field. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Table 3-5: Action Action Connect to server Disconnect from server Disconnect all servers Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Show view on monitor Show map Show 3D map Show camera on monitor Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor Record user activity (screen cam) Send email Turn camera aux on Turn camera aux off See “Connect to server” on page 69 “Disconnect from server” on page 69 “Disconnect all servers” on page 69 “Show all alarmed cameras” on page 69 “Show camera” on page 69 “Turn alarm on” on page 70 “Turn alarm off” on page 70 “Turn aux on” on page 70 “Turn aux off” on page 70 “Show group” on page 71 “Show view” on page 71 “Show view on monitor” on page 71 “Show map” on page 71 “Show 3D map” on page 72 “Show camera on monitor” on page 72 “Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor” on page 72 “Record user activity (screen cam)” on page 72 “Send email” on page 73 “Turn camera aux on” on page 73 “Turn camera aux off” on page 73 3-68 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. select the action you wish to occur in response to the selected server’s alarm(s) being triggered and the Alarm Manager notification being received. Inc. .

If in the first Action drop-down list you selected . SiteManager automatically displays the selected camera. See “Server Alarm Call Priority” on page 3-56 for information about automatic connection to the server of the triggered alarm. SiteManager automatically disconnects from the selected server. and the Fullscreen check box appear in the Action dialog box.. Inc. Show all alarmed cameras Show camera A Search field and button. If you selected Connect to server. Connect to server The Server drop-down list with a list of all the servers available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. SiteManager automatically connects to the selected server. select the required server. Each alarmed camera is displayed in its individual camera video screen.e. SiteManager automatically disconnects from all the servers to which the SiteManager client is currently connected. Inc. You can check which cameras are alarmed by observing the alarms management panel’s Cameras column. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the complete server resource hierarchy. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. select the required server. SiteManager automatically displays all the cameras that have been configured to record in response to the triggered alarm (i. Disconnect all servers When am Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. alarmed cameras). 24-10248-56 Rev. If you selected Disconnect from server. Disconnect from server The Server drop-down list with a list of all the servers available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 11. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Connect to server action is therefore provided so that the SiteManager client can connect to a server other than the server of the triggered alarm. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm.. 3-69 . The options listed on the second Action dialog box depend on the action selected in the Action drop-down list. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. NOTE SiteManager will automatically connect to the server of the triggered alarm (unless otherwise configured).

Turn aux on A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. SiteManager automatically turns on the selected alarm. Enter the resource name in the text box and click the Search button. SiteManager searches the hierarchy for a match and displays the results. Turn aux off A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. SiteManager automatically turns off the selected alarm. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. If you selected Turn aux off. SiteManager automatically turns off the selected aux. Turn alarm off A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. If you want the selected camera to be displayed in the full screen mode. select the required camera. select the Fullscreen check box. then select the required alarm in the resource hierarchy. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If you selected Turn aux on. 3-70 24-10248-56 Rev. then select the required aux in the resource hierarchy. but will not be successful if there is a spelling mistake in the text box. to close the screen and return to SiteManager. When in full screen mode. The search is not case sensitive. Turn alarm on A Search field and button and the complete server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. then select the required alarm in the resource hierarchy. . NOTE You can use the Search tools to locate the required server resource. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. If you selected Turn alarm off. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. double-click over the video image. SiteManager automatically turns on the selected aux. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If you selected Show camera. then select the required aux in the resource hierarchy. If you selected Turn alarm on. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc.

Show view The View drop-down list with a list of all the views available in the SiteManager configuration and the Fullscreen check box appear in the Action dialog box. If you selected Show view on monitor. SiteManager automatically displays all the resources (cameras. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. maps and/or views) included in the selected group. Inc. If the Local check box is disabled. SiteManager automatically displays the selected view. If you selected Show group. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. 3-71 . Use the Monitor drop-down list to select the VGA monitor you wish the selected view to be displayed on. Inc. using the View drop-down list. use the View drop-down list to select the required view. select the required view. All of the selected group’s resources appear on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev. A preview of the selected view’s layout appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box. SiteManager automatically displays the selected view on the selected VGA monitor. Show map The Map drop-down list with a list of all the 2D maps available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. no VGA monitors are listed. If you wish for the selected view to be displayed in the full screen mode. Show view on monitor The View drop-down list with a list of all the views available in the SiteManager configuration and the Monitor drop-down list with a list of all the VGA monitors available in the SiteManager configuration appear in the Action dialog box. the SiteManager client automatically connects to all the corresponding servers to successfully display the selected view. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. select the Fullscreen check box. A preview of the selected view’s layout appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Show group SiteManager The Group drop-down list with a list of all the groups available in the SiteManager configuration appear in the Action dialog box. If you selected Show view. If the selected view includes cameras from multiple servers. select the required group. SiteManager automatically displays the selected 2D map.

Inc. If you selected Show camera on monitor. A preview of the selected 3D map appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If you selected Show map. use the Monitor drop-down list to select the required monitor. select the required 2D map. Show 3D map The 3D Map drop-down list with a list of all the 3D maps available in the SiteManager configuration appears in the Action dialog box. Inc. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. alarmed cameras) on the selected monitor. Use the Monitor drop-down list to select the monitor you wish the selected camera to be displayed on. A preview of the selected 2D map appears on the right-hand side of the Actions dialog box. © 2011 Johnson Controls. no VGA monitors are listed. . only the available network monitors are listed.e. Show camera on monitor A Search field and button. SiteManager automatically displays the selected camera on the selected monitor. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the complete server resource hierarchy. select the required 3D map. Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor The Monitor drop-down list with a list of all VGA monitors available in the SiteManager configuration and the Duration drop-down list appear in the Action dialog box. Each alarmed camera is displayed for the length of time specified in the Duration field. SiteManager automatically records the SiteManager screen and all user activity for the duration of the alarm alert. If you selected Show 3D map. If you selected Cycle alarmed cameras on monitor. If the Local check box is disabled. Record user activity (screen cam) When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. If the Local check box is disabled. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. select the required camera. 3-72 24-10248-56 Rev. SiteManager automatically displays all the cameras that have been configured to record in response to the triggered alarm (i. SiteManager automatically displays the selected 3D map. and the Monitor drop-down list with a list of all the monitors available in the SiteManager configuration appear in the Action dialog box.

The Camera aux drop-down list lists all the available auxes for the selected camera. 12. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. Inc. Click OK and see “Configuring the SMTP Server Settings” on page 3-59 for assistance. when an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. and a Camera aux drop-down list with a list of all the auxes available for the camera selected in the server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. The Camera aux drop-down list lists all the available auxes for the selected camera. the complete server resource hierarchy. When an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. the complete server resource hierarchy.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager The screen camera footage is stored as configured by the administrator and will be available for reviewing at any time. Inc. 3-73 . If you selected Turn camera aux on. select the required camera. and a Camera aux drop-down list with a list of all the auxes available for the camera selected in the server resource hierarchy appear in the Action dialog box. Use the Camera aux drop-down list to select the aux you wish to be turned on or off. Turn camera aux on A Search field and button. SiteManager automatically turns on the selected camera’s aux. SiteManager automatically sends an email to the specified recipient(s) according to the configuration. select the required camera. See “Send Email Alarm Action Configuration” on page 3-77 for instructions on configuring the Send email alarm action. SiteManager automatically turns off the selected camera’s aux. Click OK. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev. If you have configured the SMTP server settings and you select Send email. Use the Camera aux drop-down list to select the aux you wish to be turned on or off. Send email If you selected Send email and you have not configured the SMTP server settings on the SiteManager client. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Turn camera aux off A Search field and button. you will receive a warning message. as necessary. If you selected Turn camera aux off.

SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Events Configuration window appears with the selected action added. If you wish the sound configured for the selected server’s alarms to be audible when the selected alarm is triggered and an Alarm Manager notification is received. 16. To create additional actions for the selected event. Inc. If the Turn off alarm on ack check box is deselected. 13. select the Turn off alarm on ack check box. when the user acknowledges the alarm. skip to step 35. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. . 14. select the Play sound check box. If you wish the user to acknowledge the Alarm Manager notification for the selected event by simply double-clicking on the triggered alarm in the alarms management panel. 15. The user will have to manually turn off the alarm. 18. the triggered alarm will not change state. See “Server Alarm Call Priority” on page 3-56 for additional information. the actions will occur in the order in which they were configured. NOTE When an alarm notification is received for the configured alarm event. Continue with step 19 if you wish the user to acknowledge the Alarm Manager notification for the selected event by performing one of the following actions: • • Clicking Acknowledge on the Alarm Acknowledge window Requesting the user to enter details about the actions taken in response to the alarm or any other pertinent information regarding the triggered alarm 3-74 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. 17. To turn off the triggered alarm when a user acknowledges the Alarm Manager notification. To remove an existing action from the selected event. © 2011 Johnson Controls. click Add action and repeat the steps in this section. select the action and click Remove action. The selected action will be removed.

then select the Show alarm information and Request operator notes check boxes. the user does not have to double-click on the flashing alarm icon to display the window). so that the user only needs to click the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the triggered alarm. Click Detail. so that the user only needs to click the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the triggered alarm. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. then deselect the Request operator notes check box and select the Show alarm information check box. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered with a note request only. 3-75 . 22. 23. Inc. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed as soon as the alarm is received (i.e. Select the Require acknowledge check box in the Event column. so that the user should enter details about the actions taken in response to the alarm (or any other pertinent information regarding the triggered alarm prior to being able to acknowledge the triggered alarm). 21. 24-10248-56 Rev. The Detail button will become enabled. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered with complete alarm information only. The Alarm acknowledge configuration window appears. 20.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual • SiteManager Prompting the user to perform certain tasks in response to the triggered alarm 19. 24. then deselect the Show alarm information check box. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered with complete alarm information and a note request. If you wish the alarm acknowledge window to be displayed when the selected alarm is triggered without any alarm information or note requests. © 2011 Johnson Controls. so that the user should enter details about the actions taken in response to the alarm (or any other pertinent information regarding the triggered alarm prior to being able to acknowledge the triggered alarm). deselect the Show alarm information and Request operator notes check boxes. 25. then select the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received check box.

as needed. The next operation will be added to the Alarm acknowledgement configuration window. 27. 31. when the Alarm Manager notification is received when the selected alarm is triggered). 3-76 24-10248-56 Rev. The selected operation will be removed. type in the first task which the user must perform when the selected alarm is triggered (i. To remove all existing operations from the selected event. Edit the text.call 123 4567”. continue with step 31. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. select the Accept failure check box. All operations will be removed. An operation will be added to the Alarm acknowledge configuration window. by utilizing the formatting buttons above the operation. In the white section of the operation. The Alarm acknowledge configuration window will close and the Event configuration window will open.e. 33. 28. Inc. Click Yes at the Confirmation dialog box. Click Add operation. To remove an existing operation from the selected event. 29. “Notify the security manager .SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 26. Click Yes at the Confirmation dialog box. Click OK on the Alarm acknowledge configuration window. 30. Inc. click Remove all. Repeat steps 27-30 to add the required operation. If you wish the user to receive a list of tasks which must be performed prior to acknowledging the triggered alarm. 34. . If you wish the user to be able to acknowledge the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been performed and indicate whether the task execution was successful (ok) or unsuccessful (failed). For example. continue with step 27. skip to step 31. If you do not wish the user to receive a list of tasks that must be performed prior to acknowledging the triggered alarm. © 2011 Johnson Controls. select the operation you wish to remove by clicking on any part of the required operation and click Remove operation. click Add operation. If you wish the user to be able to acknowledge the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been successfully performed. 32. To create additional operations which the user must perform prior to acknowledging the triggered alarm for the selected event.

you must configure the SMTP server settings according to “Configuring the SMTP Server Settings” on page 3-59. Inc. 37. 38. NOTE Do not use the same alarm as a source in two or more events. The selected event will be fully displayed. Click Add action. From the menu bar. repeat the previous steps as many times as is necessary to create all the events you wish to be included in the SiteManager configuration. select Tools>Events Configuration. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 35. 3. 24-10248-56 Rev. 36. Click Add on the Events Configuration dialog box. The selected event will be deleted. Click Yes at the Confirmation dialog box. Send Email Alarm Action Configuration The Send Email alarm feature allows you to configure SiteManager to automatically send an email to specified recipients when an Alarm Manager notification is received from the selected server and alarm. Click OK on the Event configuration window to save the event configuration settings. Before configuring alarm actions.  To configure the Send email alarm settings: 1. select the event by clicking on the required event row. Click Delete. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. SiteManager You must click Apply after completing each event and before adding a new event. Click Apply. To add another event to the event configuration. Inc. 2. To remove an event. 3-77 .

Select Send eMail from the Action drop-down list. 7. 12. 11. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Fill in the From and Subject text boxes as required. as needed. Locate the file and click Open. enter the recipient’s email address. The selected file will be attached to the e-mail. If you wish for the email to be sent to multiple recipients. select the appropriate category – To. 3-78 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. 5. You may repeat this step to attach multiple files to the email. type in any text which you wish to be included in the e-mail. 9. The To drop-down list will be enabled and another drop-down list will be added. To attach an item to the e-mail. Click on the text box next to To. as needed. In the bottom half of the screen. Inc. The fields associated with the Send eMail action appear below the Action drop-down list. click the paper clip symbol. 6. Cc or Bcc. From the first drop-down list. repeat steps 7 and 8 for consecutive drop-down lists. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click OK. 10.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 4. 8. Next to the first drop-down list. .

the queued notifications will be received. 3-79 . Inc. From the menu bar. If the number of alarm notifications exceeds the specified maximum. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.  To configure additional alarm notification settings: 1. As the alarm notifications which have been received are acknowledged. 2. select the user who you wish to be logged on automatically and receive the Alarm Manager notification when none of the users are logged on to SiteManager at the time of the Alarm Manager notification. even when none of the users are logged on. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Options . This will ensure that all alarm notifications will be received by the SiteManager client. the selected user will not be logged on and the alarm notification will not be received. IMPORTANT SiteManager must be installed and alarm manager must be running at the client in order for the specified user to be logged on automatically. In addition.Alarm notification tab window appears. the administrator may select a user who will be automatically logged on to SiteManager and receive the notification. you can define the maximum number of alarms which can be processed simultaneously (the maximum number of Alarm Manager notifications which can be received at the same time). 3. Only the administrator can access the Options window and configure the alarm notification settings. From the Alarm user drop-down list. Inc. If SiteManager is closed. select Tools>Options. When an alarm notification is sent and a user is logged on.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Configuring Alarm Notification Settings If none of the users are logged on to SiteManager at the time of an Alarm Manager notification. the user already logged on will receive the alarm notification. The Options . 24-10248-56 Rev.General tab window appears. Click the Alarm notification tab. the notifications will queue up.

the queued notifications will be received. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The configured settings will be applied. As the alarm notifications which have been received are acknowledged (triggered alarms are turned off). Click OK. NOTE All the users created in SiteManager will be listed in the Alarm user drop-down list. The Options window will close and the settings will not be saved. when an alarm is triggered. The Options window will close and the settings will be saved. See “Creating User Accounts” on page 3-13 for detailed information about creating and editing user accounts. 6. If the alarm notifications exceed the specified number. Managing Alarm Events SiteManager allows the administrator to uniquely configure each alarm event so that when an Alarm Manager notification is received for each alarm. a unique sequence of events will occur. Click Apply. The administrator is by default assigned to receive Alarm Manager notifications when none of the users are logged on to SiteManager. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. IMPORTANT If the Alarm user drop-down list is left empty (a user is not selected). The specified number will be the maximum number of alarm notifications which can be received at the same time. 4. A user’s response to an alarm (management of alarm events) will be influenced by the configuration of each alarm event.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual When an Alarm Manager notification is sent to the SiteManager client and none of the users are logged on at the time. 3-80 24-10248-56 Rev. The following procedures provide details about managing alarm events based on the server alarm call priority and the alarm event configuration. See “Server Alarm Call Priority” on page 3-56 and “Configuring Alarm Events” on page 3-64 for detailed information about configuring alarm events. the notifications will queue up. the selected user will be automatically logged on and will receive the notification. the Alarm Manager notification will not be received if none of the users are logged on to SiteManager at the time of notification. Enter the maximum number of alarms that can be processed simultaneously by using the scroll bar arrows or by typing in the preferred number. . 5. If you do not wish to save any settings. click Cancel. Inc.

Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager IMPORTANT In all of the following procedures it is assumed that the server has been configured to notify the remote client of the triggered alarm. even if Connect on alarm is disabled:           Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off The remaining 8 alarm event actions will not result in an automatic connection to the server if Connect on alarm is disabled. Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications Determined by the Server Alarm Call Priority For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. Cameras 1. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 server alarms and the event has been configured to play the alarm sound. When Alarm 1 is triggered. and none of the sequences will occur. If the server is not configured to notify the remote client. 3-81 . the client will not be alerted. The alarm event action for Alarm 1 has been configured to show Cameras 3 on Monitor 1. and 6 are set to record in response to  Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. © 2011 Johnson Controls. one of the following scenarios will occur: 24-10248-56 Rev. the alarm notification will not be sent. 2. Inc. The following alarm event actions will cause the SiteManager client to automatically connect to the server which has sent the alarm notification. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for detailed information about remote client alarm notification.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. See “Configuring Alarm Events” on page 3-64 for detailed information about configuring automatic alarm event actions. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. When a user is logged on to SiteManager and not connected to the DVN 5000 Series server of Alarm 1. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. the current connection to the server will be used and the following will occur: • • The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. if Connect on alarm is enabled and if the server configuration requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. • • • If Connect on alarm is disabled. and page 3-91. B. then the Connecting to server window will appear. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. © 2011 Johnson Controls. A connection will be established with the server and the following will occur: • • The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. Follow the procedures to respond and acknowledge the alarm notification on page 3-86. if Connect on alarm is enabled. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event). If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. When a user is logged on to SiteManager and connected to the DVN 5000 Series server of Alarm 1. the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. the time of alarm activation. the current connection will be used and all of the events outlined above will occur. since you are already connected to the Server. Inc. . The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual A. • • • 3-82 24-10248-56 Rev. page 3-87. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event). and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). the time of alarm activation. Inc. You must enter your DVN server user name and password. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras).

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. Inc. SiteManager will establish a connection with the server (DVN 5000). • • • As the SiteManager client will not connect to the server.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager If Connect on alarm is enabled. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. 24-10248-56 Rev. and if the server configuration requires or not the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. If any of the following alarm event actions are configured for Alarm 1. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. a connection will not be established with the server. 3-83 . and acknowledging the alarm will turn off the alarm at the server. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event). and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. even though the Connect on alarm is disabled: • • • • • • • • • • Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off The sequence of events will be the same as when Connect on alarm is enabled. a connection will be established automatically with the server and all of the events outlined above will occur. acknowledging the alarm (turning off the alarm) at SiteManager will not turn off the alarm at the server. When a user is logged on to SiteManager and not connected to the DVN 5000 Series server of Alarm 1. and if the server configuration does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. the time of alarm activation. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. but the following will occur: • • The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. if Connect on alarm is disabled.

and if the server configuration requires or not the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. then the user selected to receive alarm notifications will be automatically logged on. page 3-87. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. Inc. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. a connection will be established automatically with the server. A connection will be established with the server and the following will occur: • • The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. and all of the events outlined above will occur. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. but the SiteManager application is open. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. C. See “Configuring Alarm Notification Settings” on page 3-79 for details about assigning a user who is to be logged on automatically and receive the Alarm Manager notification when none of the users are logged on to SiteManager. the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. but the following will occur: 3-84 24-10248-56 Rev. then the user selected to receive alarm notifications will be automatically logged on. You must enter your DVN server user name and password. Follow the procedures to respond and acknowledge the alarm notification on page 3-86. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. if Connect on alarm is enabled and if the server configuration requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. When a user is not logged on to SiteManager. then the user selected to receive alarm notifications will be automatically logged on and the Connecting to server window will appear. and page 3-91. the time of alarm activation. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. • • • If Connect on alarm is enabled and if the server configuration does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event). the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. a connection will not be established with the server. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. When a user is not logged on to SiteManager. if Connect on alarm is disabled. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). but the SiteManager application is open.

even though the Connect on alarm is disabled: • • • • • • • • • • Show all alarmed cameras Show camera Turn alarm on Turn alarm off Turn aux on Turn aux off Show group Show view Turn a camera aux on Turn a camera aux off The sequence of events will be the same as when Connect on alarm is enabled. and page 3-91. If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. the Alarm acknowledge window will also appear. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). If any of the following alarm event actions are configured for Alarm 1. If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. SiteManager will establish a connection with the server (DVN 5000). page 3-87. Inc. All alarm event actions which have been configured for the triggered alarm (event). acknowledging the alarm (turning off the alarm) at SiteManager will not turn off the alarm at the server. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the time of alarm activation. When the SiteManager application is closed. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. Inc. • • • As the SiteManager client will not connect to the server. and acknowledging the alarm will turn off the alarm at the server. 24-10248-56 Rev. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Follow the procedures to respond and acknowledge the alarm notification on page 3-86. then when an alarm notification is sent to the client from the server. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. only the Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. 3-85 . D.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual • • SiteManager The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm.

Inc. the user must respond to and acknowledge the alarm. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). 2. 2. the time of alarm activation. The following will occur: • • • • The alarm sound will cease. Assuming that the Alarms management panel and the status bar are displayed. then turning off the triggered alarm at the SiteManager client will not turn off the alarm at the server. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. 3-86 24-10248-56 Rev.    To acknowledge the alarm (turn it off): 1. The alarm will be turned off. © 2011 Johnson Controls. You will need to manually connect to the server (or access the server via the server interface. then the following will occur:    A connection will be established with the server. .SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when no Alarm Events have been Configured at the SiteManager Client For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Cameras 1. When Alarm 1 is triggered and the Alarm Manager notification is received (in one of the ways described in the previous procedures). Inc. Double-click the alarm icon in the Alarms management panel. The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. RemoteControl. and that the SiteManager client will connect to the server when the alarm is triggered. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. If the connection is not established with the server (the Connect on alarm in the server’s configuration is disabled). and 6 are set to record in response to  Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. or locally) and turn off the alarm. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 Series server alarms.

The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. and 6 are set to record in response to Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. the time of alarm activation. Inc. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. Double-click the alarm icon in the Alarms management panel. When Alarm 1 is triggered and the Alarm Manager notification is received (in one of the ways described in the first procedure in this section). © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2. the user must respond to and acknowledge the alarm. then the following will occur: • • The alarm sound will cease.  To acknowledge the alarm (turn it off): NOTE If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user.    If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. If all of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured not to request user acknowledgement (the Require acknowledge box is not selected in the Events configuration window). The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras). 2. Assuming that the Alarms management panel and the status bar are displayed and that the SiteManager client will connect to the server when the alarm is triggered. The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when one or more Alarm Events but no Operations have been Configured at the SiteManager Client For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. Cameras 1. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 Series server alarms and the event has been configured to play the alarm sound. 3-87 . The alarm event for Alarm 1 has been configured with the action show Cameras 3 on Monitor 1. then the following will occur:    A connection will be established with the server. the Alarm acknowledge window will already be displayed. 1. Camera 3 will be displayed on Monitor 1.

The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. then the following Alarm acknowledge window appears. The alarm will be turned off. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request user acknowledgement only (the Require acknowledge box is selected in the Event configuration window. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request user acknowledgement and display alarm information (the Require acknowledge box is selected in the Event configuration window and the Show alarm information box is selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). 3-88 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. © 2011 Johnson Controls. then the following Alarm acknowledge window appears. The following will occur: • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. Click Acknowledge. Inc. Click Acknowledge. . The following will occur: • • • • • The alarm sound will cease The Alarm acknowledge window will close. 3. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. but the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. 4.SiteManager • • The alarm will be turned off.

The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. “Contacted supervisor and sent one guard to the alarmed site”). 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Type in the necessary information (for example. Click Acknowledge. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). then the following Alarm acknowledge window appears. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information and request user acknowledgement and operator’s notes (the Require acknowledge. NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. 6.e. Inc. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request user acknowledgement and operator’s notes (the Require acknowledge box is selected in the Event configuration window and the Request operator notes box is selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). The system log will document the operator’s notes. 3-89 . and the Request operator notes boxes are selected. Show alarm information.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 5. The following will occur: • • • • • • The alarm sound will cease.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log appears. If operator’s notes were requested and typed in. NOTE If the connection is not established with the server (the Connect on alarm in the server’s configuration is disabled). 7. Inc. . 2. NOTE If the SiteManager application is closed. You will need to manually connect to the server (or access the server via the server interface. Inc. The alarm event for Alarm 1 has been configured with the action show Cameras 3 on Monitor 1 and the following operation: “Contact the Senior Security Manager on 123-4567. The following will occur: • • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. All performed operations and operator notes will be red. Click Acknowledge.” 3-90 24-10248-56 Rev. Alarm Manager notifications are also logged using red text. RemoteControl or locally) and turn off the alarm. Use the system log scroll bar to locate the required information. Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when one or more Alarm Events with a Single Operation have been Configured at the SiteManager Client For example: Alarm 1 (connected to a DVN 5000 Series server) is configured to be triggered when the Prime sector is locked. The alarm will be turned off. The system log is not deleted when users log on or out. the notes can be viewed in the system log by clicking the Log actions tab. “Contacted supervisor and sent one guard to the alarmed site”). the next time SiteManager is opened.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Type in the necessary information (for example. as the system log is deleted when the application is closed. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. An alarm sound has been allocated for the DVN 5000 Series server alarms and the event has been configured to play the alarm sound. Cameras 1. the system log will no longer contain the operator’s notes. then turning off the triggered alarm at the SiteManager client will not turn off the alarm at the server. and 6 are set to record in response to  Alarm 1 and your SiteManager client will be notified when the alarm is triggered. The system log will document the operator’s notes.

the user must respond to and acknowledge the alarm. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will illuminate. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If the operation has been configured so that the user may turn off the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been performed and indicate whether the task execution was successful (OK) or unsuccessful (failed) (the Accept failure box is selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window) then continue with step 8.    If the alarm notification originated at a DVN 5000 server. if one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured not to display alarm information or request operator’s notes (the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). The Alarms management panel and the status bar will display the name of the triggered alarm. an e-mail may also be sent to the client according to the server’s configuration. The system log will document all of the alarm events and tasks performed by the user. the Alarm acknowledge window will already be displayed. Camera 3 will be displayed on Monitor 1. Assuming that the Alarms management panel and the status bar are displayed and that the SiteManager client will connect to the server when the alarm is triggered. 3-91 . Double-click the alarm icon in the Alarms management panel. and the cameras which have been configured to record in response to the alarm (alarmed cameras).VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager When Alarm 1 is triggered and the Alarm Manager notification is received (in one of the ways described in the previous procedures). If the Automatically show acknowledge request when alarm is received option has been selected for the triggered alarm. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear.  To acknowledge the alarm (turn it off): 1. the server the triggered alarm is connected to. Inc. The selected alarm sound will become audible for the duration of the alarm. then the following will occur:    A connection will be established with the server. 2. 3. If the operation has been configured so that the user may turn off the triggered alarm only after the specified task has been successfully performed. the time of alarm activation. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev.

The alarm will be turned off. Click OK. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. Perform the operation. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled) then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. © 2011 Johnson Controls. NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information only (the Show alarm information box is selected and the Request operator notes box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window. 4. 3-92 24-10248-56 Rev. The Alarm acknowledge window will close.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Read the text. Click Acknowledge. The Acknowledge button appears. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.e. . The following will occur: • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. Inc.

The following will occur: • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. Inc. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. Perform the operation. Click OK. Click Acknowledge. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request operator’s notes only (the Request operator notes box is selected and the Show alarm information box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Read the text.e. 3-93 . The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The alarm will be turned off. 5. NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. The Acknowledge button appears.

The following will occur: • • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. Type in the necessary information (for example. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. Perform the operation. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information and request operator’s notes (both the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window).e. The alarm will be turned off. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. 3-94 24-10248-56 Rev. The system log will document the operator’s notes. . Click Acknowledge. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. Inc. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). 6. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. Inc. “Contacted the Senior Security Manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site”).SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Read the text. The text window and the Acknowledge button appear. Click OK.

Type in the necessary information (for example. Inc. Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Read the text. Click OK. The system log will document the operator’s notes. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The alarm will be turned off. 3-95 . The following will occur: • • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Perform the operation. Continue with step 12. 8. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). Click Acknowledge. “Contacted the Senior Security manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site”). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured not to display alarm information or request operator’s notes (the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are not 24-10248-56 Rev. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. 7. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The text window and the Acknowledge button appear. NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i.e. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window.

The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The alarm will be turned off. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. 9. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. • • • • • • • • If the operation was successfully performed. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The alarm sound will cease. click Failed. Inc. If the operation was not successfully performed. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. The following will occur: NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. Click Acknowledge. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information only (the Show alarm information box is selected and the Request operator notes box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). Perform the operation. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. the Connect on alarm in the server’s configuration is enabled). Inc.e. click OK. Read the text.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). 3-96 24-10248-56 Rev. .

10. The following will occur: NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. Read the text. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. The alarm will be turned off. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click Acknowledge. click Failed. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to request operator’s notes only (the Request operator notes box is selected and the Show alarm information box is not selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). Perform the operation. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. 3-97 . • If the operation was successfully performed. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). If the operation was not successfully performed.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Read the text. Perform the operation.e. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. • • • • • • • • If the operation was successfully performed. 24-10248-56 Rev. The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. click OK. click OK. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. Inc. The alarm sound will cease. Inc.

“Contacted the Senior Security Manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site”). The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. The system log will document the operator’s notes. Click Acknowledge. The following will occur: • The alarm sound will cease.e. Type in the necessary information (for example.SiteManager • VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the operation was not successfully performed. If one or more of the alarm events for the triggered alarm have been configured to display alarm information and request operator’s notes (both the Show alarm information and the Request operator notes boxes are selected in the Alarm acknowledge configuration window). The following will occur: • • • • • • • The alarm sound will cease. “Contacted the Senior Security Manager and sent one guard to the alarmed site”). The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. Type in the necessary information (for example. The Alarm acknowledge window will close. then the following Alarm acknowledge window will appear. Read the text. Inc. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. If the operation was not successfully performed. click Failed. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. click OK. click Failed. © 2011 Johnson Controls. • • If the operation was successfully performed. 11. 3-98 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. The alarm will be turned off. Click Acknowledge. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Perform the operation. .

the next time SiteManager is opened. Use the system log scroll bar to locate the required information. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If the operation was performed successfully. NOTE If the SiteManager application is closed. 14. follow the steps in “Managing Incoming Alarm Manager Notifications when one or more Alarm Events with a Single Operation have been Configured at the SiteManager Client” on page 3-90. the system log will no longer contain the operator’s notes. The Alarm Manager icon on the client’s taskbar will not be illuminated. 24-10248-56 Rev. which must be performed by the user prior to acknowledging a triggered alarm.e. The alarm will be turned off. The system log is not deleted when users log in or out. Inc. as the system log is deleted when the application is closed. 12. You will need to manually connect to the server (or access the server via the server interface. All performed operations and all operator notes can be viewed in the system log by clicking the Log actions tab. the next operation in the sequence will be displayed. “FAILED” will be written next to the operation. then turning off the triggered alarm at SiteManager will turn off the alarm at the server only if the Turn alarm off on ack check box is selected on the Event configuration window. RemoteControl or locally) and turn off the alarm. To manage alarm events with two or more operations. The system log will document whether the operation was performed successful or unsuccessful. If it was unsuccessfully. Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual • • • • • • The Alarm acknowledge window will close. If the connection is not established with the server (the Connect on alarm in the server’s configuration is disabled). “DONE” will be written next to the operation. Alarm Manager notifications are also logged using red text. The system log will document the operator’s notes. Managing Alarm Events With Multiple Operations The administrator may configure alarm events with multiple operations. then turning off the triggered alarm at the SiteManager client will not turn off the alarm at the server. SiteManager The alarm will be removed from the Alarms management panel. and note that each time the user clicks OK or Failed. the Connect on alarm in the server's configuration is enabled). NOTE If the connection is established with the server (i. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The system log will appear. 3-99 . All performed operations and operator notes will be red. 13.

all of the selected server’s alarms will be silent during the specified time interval. Inc. To silence server alarms. © 2011 Johnson Controls.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The user must perform and respond to each of the operations. Type in the notes (if required) and click Acknowledge. Once the last operation has been performed and responded to. . If all the server alarms need to be silent for a particular reason. the Acknowledge button will appear (with or without the operator’s notes text window. depending on the configuration). Inc. By selecting this option. Silencing Server Alarms SiteManager allows you to choose a particular time interval when all the alarms from a selected server will be silent. such as during system maintenance. it eliminates the need for silencing each alarm manually and then later individually reactivating potentially hundreds of alarms. you must be 3-100 24-10248-56 Rev. Alarm call priority will not be functional if an alarm is triggered during a “silence” time interval. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

If you wish to reactivate the alarms before the end of the time interval.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager granted the right to create and/or edit resources based upon your user account configuration. 3. Click the Silence alarms in this time interval check box. and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar 2. click the Alarm silence tab. They include:      Playback commands Sector selection Window recorder Print Save 24-10248-56 Rev. Click OK. You may also use the keyboard and type in the start/stop dates and times. 3-101 . The Alarm silence panel appears.  To silence server alarms: 1. The From and To drop-down lists and scroll bars will be enabled. Select the start date and time and stop date and time. To select the Edit server option: • • Right-click the server in the hierarchy window and click Edit server. or Click the server in the hierarchy window. 5. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The alarms will be silent during the specified time interval. CAMERA VIDEO SCREEN FUNCTIONS This section provides detailed information on the functions available on the camera video screen. 4. The alarms will be enabled. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. deselect the Silence alarms in this time interval check box and click OK. In the Server window. Click the Servers tab. The alarms will cease to be silent after the specified period. Inc. Inc.

Camera Video Screens One of the advantages of SiteManager is the ability to view numerous cameras simultaneously. and DVN 100-NET encoders. The camera video screen can be categorized into the Viewing area and the Toolbar: Viewing area Toolbar 3-102 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. unless otherwise stated. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. it is displayed in its individual video screen. detailed information is provided about:      Camera sectors Playing back video footage and audio Exporting image and file formats Finding still images or video clips Saving still images or video clips (manually or on the fly) NOTE In this section. the term “server” refers to DVN 5000 Series and DVN 3000 Series servers. . These screens are totally independent of one another. Since connection quality is server dependent. See the following figure. Inc. thus allowing custom viewing of each camera.SiteManager Find Visual search Audio VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual    In addition. changing the quality of one camera will change the quality of all the cameras connected to that particular server. Inc. When a camera is enabled.

The camera video screen appears. 2. see “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109. You must be connected to the server to display the cameras. 3. The screen menu appears. Click and drag the specific camera from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. Display a camera video screen by performing one of the following actions: • • • • Double-click on the camera in the hierarchy window. See “Editing Server Network Connections” on page 3-26 for information about accessing the Server menu.  To access the camera video screen menu and work with the options: 1.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager For detailed button and feature descriptions of the video screen toolbar. You may also display all cameras connected to a single server by selecting Autodisplay in the Server menu. Right-click on the camera in the hierarchy window and select Show in the camera resource menu. This gives you the ability to custom view numerous cameras simultaneously. allowing you to work with each camera independently. Working with the Camera Video Screen Options Every camera video screen has its own set of menu options. Right-click the viewing area. 24-10248-56 Rev. Click the specific camera in the hierarchy window and select Resource>Show from the menu bar. Inc. Select one of the following options: Show Toolbar This toggle button allows you to display or hide the toolbar. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. You may choose to view a tour on camera 1 while at the same time following Time Lapse playback on camera 2. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-103 .

Video Resolution Allows you to dynamically change MPEG4 encoding at the server remotely from the SiteManager client. Inc. see “Servers” on page 3-18. Quality Allows you to change image quality in relation to the available bandwidth. Enhance video quality Allows you to improve video quality of cameras using the MPEG4 compression codec by increasing CPU utilization. . Enabling the video quality enhancer will significantly increase utilization of the CPU. For information abut the available qualities.SiteManager Window size VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Determines the number of pixels and the size of a camera video screen. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Enhance high resolution MPEG An MPEG4 filter which allows you to minimize the visual artefacts that result from MPEG4 compression. the video quality will be maximized but the CPU utilization will also be high. This feature is only functional if there are encoders configured at the server and/or MPEG4 Adaptive is enabled. If enabled. 3-104 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

Allows you to move the camera if it is PTZ enabled.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Send to monitor SiteManager Allows you to the display the selected camera on a VGA or network (DVN 100-NET) monitor. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-105 . © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Iris Allows you to change the diameter of the lens iris if the camera is PTZ enabled. Tour Allows you select one of the 8 camera tours. Focus Allows you to focus the camera if it is PTZ enabled. Preset Allows you to select one of the 16 preset camera positions. Inc. You can only send a camera to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. 24-10248-56 Rev. Move Zoom Allows you to zoom the camera if it is PTZ enabled.

© 2011 Johnson Controls.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE Presets and tours are predefined on the corresponding server. you can move the camera dome(s) and adjust the zoom. The PTZ function for camera domes is only functional when a camera dome is displayed in its individual camera video screen. Inc. Right-click on the camera in the hierarchy window and select Show in the camera resource menu. see “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242 for additional information about the camera video screen. for further information. Select the options. The PTZ function may be accessed via the screen menu options. or zoom a camera dome using the screen menu. tilt. Select the specific camera in the hierarchy window and select Resource>Show from the menu bar. by opening a camera video screen and using the mouse cursor. as required. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. To pan. Inc. You can only adjust a camera dome’s focus and iris level via the screen menu. such as the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual. 4. Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera Dome If a DVN 5000 or DVN 3000 Series server to which the SiteManager client is connected has one or more camera domes connected and configured. Refer to the appropriate server manual. Display a camera video screen by performing one of the following actions: • • • • Double-click on the camera in the hierarchy window. You must be granted the right to use resources upon your account configuration to use the PTZ function. Also. see “Working with the Camera Video Screen Options” on page 3-103. 3-106 24-10248-56 Rev. . focus and iris levels. or by using keyboard shortcuts (see “Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control” on page 108).  To move a camera dome: 1. Click and drag the specific camera from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. roll the mouse wheel backward until the desired optical zoom level is achieved. right-click over the camera video and select the tour currently playing from the Tour menu.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The camera video screen appears. If the camera dome is configured correctly. roll the mouse wheel forward until the desired optical zoom level is achieved. 24-10248-56 Rev. To stop a scheduled targets tour. To move the camera dome. To zoom out using the digital zoom. you must first reach the upper zoom limit of the optical zoom. Roll the mouse wheel forward until you cannot zoom in any further. NOTE If the PTZ camera is currently being controlled by a scheduled targets tour. Inc. To zoom out using the optical zoom. Roll the mouse wheel backward. To zoom in using the digital zoom. 6. Click on the video window and roll the mouse wheel forward. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window. You must be connected to the server to display the camera. Dome cursor 3. Place the mouse cursor in the middle of the camera video screen. the Dome cursor appears. you must stop the tour before you can manually control the camera. Observe the corresponding changes in the video window. Inc. Continue to roll the mouse wheel forward until the desired digital zoom level is achieved. SiteManager 2. click and drag the dome cursor on the video window until the desired position is reached. 3-107 . you can only zoom out using the digital zoom if the camera dome is already digitally zoomed in. 7. To zoom in using the optical zoom. 4. 5. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

Expand the server whose PTZ camera(s) you wish to control. 5.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 8. From the list of cameras. Inc. double-click the PTZ camera you wish to control. NOTE To control a PTZ camera from SiteManager. Table 3-6: Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control via SiteManager PTZ Command Zoom In Keyboard Shortcut and 3-108 24-10248-56 Rev. 3. To adjust the camera dome's focus and/or iris levels. Inc. 4. Control the PTZ camera using the keyboard shortcuts in Table 3-6. Select the Servers tab. . Expand the Cameras item. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the video window of the camera you wish to control must be selected. which can be used to control a PTZ camera as an alternative to using the right-mouse menu options or the mouse cursor. The video window for the selected camera opens. 2. follow the procedure described in “Working with the Camera Video Screen Options” on page 3-103. Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control SiteManager supports keyboard shortcuts.  To control a PTZ camera using keyboard shortcuts: 1. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.... Inc.... Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar The Camera video screen toolbar consists of the following:         Playback commands Sector button Record button Save button Print button Visual search button Find button Mute button 24-10248-56 Rev.... 3-109 . © 2011 Johnson Controls..VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Table 3-6: Keyboard Shortcuts for PTZ Camera Control via SiteManager PTZ Command Zoom Out Focus Near Focus Far Iris Open Iris Close Go to Preset Initiate Target Tour Move Camera Left Move Camera Right Move Camera Up Move Camera Down Keyboard Shortcut and and and and and and and and and and and . .. Inc..

Allows you to go to the end of the camera's video footage and audio archive. Allows you to fast rewind video footage and audio and rewind the video footage and audio frame by frame when used with the Pause button. 3-110 24-10248-56 Rev. All the video footage and audio will be stored in the location according to the administrator's window recorder settings configuration. Table 3-7: Video Screen Toolbar Buttons and Features Function Description Allows you to go to the beginning of the camera’s video footage and audio archive.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Playback commands Sector Record Save Print Visual search Find Mute Buttons and Features (Camera Video Screen Toolbar) Table 3-7 provides a brief description of the function of each button on the camera video screen toolbar. Allows you to save still images as either JPEG or BMP files. Allows you to play back video footage from one of the three sectors – Prime. Inc. Allows you to save video footage on the fly while watching the camera live. Allows you to fast forward video footage and audio and forward the video footage and audio frame by frame when used with the Pause button. Time lapse and Alarm. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Allows you to print a still image. Allows you to stop video footage and audio playback. Click once to start recording and click again to stop recording. Allows you to commence video footage and audio playback. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Allows you to pause the video footage and audio playback and forward or rewind the video footage and audio frame by frame when used with the FFW and REW buttons.

which allows you to find a particular video clip by clicking on the index and export video clips by using the index export tools. Right-click on the camera in the hierarchy window and select Show in the camera resource menu.  To access and use the camera video screen toolbar: 1. “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-7: Video Screen Toolbar Buttons and Features Function Description SiteManager Opens the visual search panel. The camera video screen appears. To increase the screen resolution. Inc. Display a camera video screen by performing one of the following actions: • • • • Double-click on the camera in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the specific camera from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. and “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. see “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116. 3-111 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. move the mouse to the outer screen margin and then click and drag the screen to the desired size. For detailed information. Allows you to turn the audio channel on or off. Opens the Find window. this button is set to Mute (no audio) by default each time you open a camera video screen. The screen resolution will be increased as specified. or select the desired resolution in the resolution menu. © 2011 Johnson Controls. which allows you to find a particular video clip by selecting the date and time. 2. See “Editing Server Network Connections” on page 3-26 for information about accessing the Server menu. To help conserve bandwidth. Click the specific camera in the hierarchy window and select Resource>Show from the menu bar. You may also display all cameras connected to a single server by selecting Autodisplay in the Server menu.

SiteManager

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the toolbar is not showing, select Show Toolbar in the Screen menu.

3. To play back a video clip, use the playback commands. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114. 4. From the Sector drop-down list, select the camera sector you wish to play back.

See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for further information. 5. To record video footage as you are watching it live, click the Record icon. The video footage which you are currently viewing live will be saved in the location according to the administrator’s window recorder settings configuration. Note that the playback commands are disabled. To stop recording, click the Record icon again. 6. To save a still image, click the Save icon. The Save As window appears.

You can only save still images either as JPEG or bmp files. See “Saving a Still Image” on page 3-121. See “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122 for information about the file formats. 7. To print a still image, click the Print icon. The Print window appears. 8. To find a particular still image or beginning of a specific video clip, click the Visual search icon or click the Find icon. See “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116 for further information. 9. To mute live or played back audio, click the Speaker icon. The audio channel is muted and audio will not be transmitted through your speakers. To listen to audio, click the Audio icon again. 10. Perform the above functions, as required. See “Buttons and Features (Camera Video Screen Toolbar)” on page 3-110 for option details.

3-112

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback
A server’s storage space can be configured with up to 3 unique storage sectors – Prime, Time Lapse and Alarm. Cameras may be configured to record and store video footage in any or all of the three sectors. Sectors allow you to store information in ways that trade off recording length against quality (image compression), image resolution, and image recording rates (FPS), thus allowing flexibility in storage space utilization. The administrator has full control and flexibility of the quality, resolution, and size of the images stored in each of the three sectors. SiteManager allows you to select the camera sector whose video footage you wish to play back. By using this option you may choose to view footage and audio that was recorded in any of the three camera sectors. The conditions under which each sector operates are preset by the system administrator. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual. If enabled, motion detection recording will only occur when motion is detected and satisfies the motion detection parameters specified by the user. If enabled, activity detection recording will occur when any motion is detected, regardless of whether it satisfies the motion detection specifications or not. For detailed information about configuring alarms, refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands. DVN 100-NET encoders only transmit live video footage and audio and therefore do not have any storage or sectors. To play back video footage and audio from a DVN 100-NET encoder, the encoder must be configured as a video input on a DVN 5000 server and you must access the camera from the DVN 5000 server. To play back video footage from a server’s alarm sector, you can use the system log database to locate the alarm and therefore any video footage and audio recorded at the time of the alarm. See “Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel” on page 3-249 for additional information.  To select the camera sector: 1. Display the required camera video screen (see page 3-103). 2. Increase the screen resolution (see “Working with the Camera Video Screen Options” on page 3-103). 3. If supported by the DVN server, select one of the following options from the Sector drop-down list:

• •

Prime Time lapse

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-113

SiteManager • 4. Click Alarm in the toolbar.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

The video footage from the selected camera sector will be played back. Use the playback pad, as needed. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands. 5. To return to live viewing, click screen returns to live viewing. 6. To save or print a still image, click on the playback pad. The camera video

followed by either

or

.

Either the save or the print window appears. 7. To choose another camera sector to play back, click The camera video screen returns to live viewing. on the playback pad.

8. You may also dynamically change the camera sector during playback. As video footage is being played back, select the camera sector you wish to view from the sectors menu. The playback will continue with video footage from the newly selected camera sector.

NOTE
If there is no video footage available in a camera sector, or the camera sector is disabled, the corresponding sector will be disabled in the sectors menu.

Playing Back Video Footage and Audio
SiteManager allows you to play back recorded video footage and audio from any server to which the SiteManager client is connected. Recorded video footage and audio is played back by using standard video playback controls. If you wish to play back video footage and audio of multiple cameras at the same time, you may use the powerful synchronized multiple camera or multiple monitor playback. Searched still images can be printed, or you can save them along with any video footage and audio. See the following sections:
   

“Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 “Saving a Still Image” on page 3-121 “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122 “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190

For detailed information about playing back multiple cameras simultaneously, see “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184.

3-114

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

If you know the camera and the exact time period you would like to play back, or if there is a vast amount of footage to play back, use the Find function. See “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116.  To play back video footage and audio: 1. Display the required camera video screen (see page 3-103). 2. Increase the screen resolution (see “Working with the Camera Video Screen Options” on page 3-103). 3. If supported by the DVN server, select one of the following options from the Sector drop-down list:

• • • 4. Click

Prime Time lapse Alarm in the toolbar.

The video footage from the selected camera sector will be played back. 5. To go to the start of recorded video footage, click 6. To go to the end of recorded video footage, click 7. To fast forward the video clip, right-click . . .

To increase the speed of the fast forward function, repeatedly right-click until you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). To slow down again, right-click . . until

8. To fast rewind the video clip, right-click

To increase the speed of the rewind function, repeatedly right-click you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). To slow down again, right-click 9. To pause the video clip, click . .

Playback will stop at the chosen point in the video clip to let you view a still image. To resume, right-click or , as required, or .

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-115

SiteManager

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

10. To play back frame by frame, click and then repeatedly click to move through the video clip frame by frame, as required. 11. To temporarily fast forward or rewind, hold down of the mouse. 12. To return to live viewing, click screen returns to live viewing. or

or

using a left click

on the playback pad. The camera video

To play back a different camera sector, repeat the steps in this section. 13. To save or print a still image, click followed by either the save or the print window appears. or . Either

Finding a Still Image or Video Clip
Use the Date time search and Visual search buttons to locate required images or video footage. These buttons are available in both the camera video and view screens. If you know the date and time of the image or video clip you require, these functions allow you quick access to the recorded footage. If you do not know the date and time, use the playback commands to view all the footage. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for detailed information about playback commands. To search through recorded video footage of cameras connected to a DVN 3000 Series server, you must use the camera video screen. The Date time search and Visual search buttons are disabled for cameras connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder, since these encoders only transmit live video footage and audio. To search the video footage from a DVN 100-NET encoder, the encoder must be configured as a video input on a DVN 5000 server and you must access the camera from the DVN 5000 server. As synchronized multiple camera playback is only functional in view screens, using the find function(s) in views gives you the advantage of searching footage of multiple cameras simultaneously. For further information, see “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102, “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109, and “The View Screen” on page 3-168.  To find a still image or video clip using date and time: 1. Access the camera video screen required by performing one of the following actions: • • Double-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the appropriate camera or view icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop.

3-116

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual •

SiteManager

Right-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window and select Show.

You may also double-click the appropriate camera or view icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2. If you accessed a camera video screen, skip to step 4. 3. If you accessed a view screen, click the camera you wish to be the master of the search. The selected camera will display a red outline. 4. If supported by the DVN server, select the desired Sector from the drop-down list. The camera sector will be changed as selected, allowing you to find the required still image and/or video footage.

5. Click the Date time search button. The Find window appears.

6. Specify the date by clicking the Date drop-down arrow. The calendar window appears.

You may also simply type in the date. 7. Select the month and date required. The Find window appears with the specified date. 8. Specify the time by using the Time scroll bar or by typing it in the Time text box. 9. Click OK. If you are working on a camera video screen, then video footage recorded at the specified date and time will be displayed on the camera video screen, paused and ready for playback. 10. If you are working on a view screen, then video footage recorded at the specified date and time will be displayed for all the cameras included in the view screen, paused and ready for playback. 11. You may choose to use the playback commands to view the video footage and/or save a specific still image or video clip. For further information, see “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 and “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184. 12. To save a still image, see “Saving a Still Image” on page 3-121.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-117

If you accessed a view screen. the camera visual search panel appears. click the camera you wish to be the master of the search. 8. If you are using a camera video screen and the Time lapse sector. Access the camera video screen required by performing one of the following actions: • • • Double-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window. allowing you to find the required still image and/or video footage in the desired camera sector. the camera visual search panel appears. skip to step 4. 7. 3-118 24-10248-56 Rev. 6. 14.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 13. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 2. If you accessed a camera video screen. Inc. 5. Click the Visual search button. Right-click on the appropriate camera or view icon in the hierarchy window and select Show. the camera visual search panel appears. To save multiple video clips simultaneously. You may also double-click the appropriate camera or view icon on a 2D or a 3D map. To save a video clip.  To find a still image or video clip using visual search: 1. If you are using a camera video screen and the Alarm sector. Inc. Click and drag the appropriate camera or view icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. 4. © 2011 Johnson Controls. see “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122. select the desired Sector from the drop-down list. see “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190. . The selected camera will display a red outline. If supported by the DVN server. The camera sector will be changed as selected. If you are using a camera video screen and the Prime sector. 3.

Inc. 13. The pointer determines the start of the video clip that will be played back. If you are using a camera video screen. 15. Use the horizontal scroll bar to locate the correct date and/or time. the view visual search panel appears. or click and drag the pointer to the required time on the index. 3-119 . If you are using a view screen and the Alarm sector. The date and time in the upper left-hand corner indicate the beginning of the available recorded video footage. Use the Plus and Minus buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale. Inc. 11. If you are using a view screen and the Time lapse sector. View screens only • • 12. The date and time in the middle indicate the date and time of the video footage as currently selected by the pointer. 24-10248-56 Rev. Camera video screens and view screens • • • • The blue index represents the recorded video footage. the view visual search panel appears. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 9. the view visual search panel appears. The number of rows depends on the number of cameras included in the view screen. If you are using a view screen and the Prime sector. The names on the left-hand side of the index indicate to which camera each index row belongs. video footage will be played back starting from the time indicated by the pointer. Click the Play button . 10. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The date and time in the upper right-hand corner indicate the end of the available recorded video footage. 14.

Common format and good Common format and identical image quality relative to the file visual quality to the original size. see Table 3-8. 3-120 24-10248-56 Rev. 17. video footage will be played back for the master camera as well as all other cameras included in the view screen. recording. If you are using a view screen. To export a video clip. 18. For detailed information about view screen playback commands. Inc. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. starting from the time indicated by the pointer. DVN Series software not required. Inc. All values are descriptive and relative. see “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122. as needed. During the playback you may choose to use the scroll bar or the pointer to move through the recorded footage with greater speed and ease. Table 3-8: Still Image Features Features File size Image quality Tamper proof System compatibility Advantages JPEG Interchange (compressed) Medium Medium Yes Windows Bitmap (uncompressed) Large High Yes Common. see “Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats” on page 3-120. not required.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 16. 20. see “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184. as it is uncompressed. See “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 for details about playback commands. 19. DVN Series software Common. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats You have the option to save DVN 5000 Series still images and video clips in the following file formats: Still images:   Compressed JPEG Interchange Format Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format Video clips:    AVI Format MP4 Format MS Mpeg4 V3 Format Still Image File Type Features To help you choose the still image file type that best suits your needs. To save a video clip. Use the playback commands.

See also “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102 and “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109. Microsoft MPEG4 format. if the video was recorded at 2CIF. This format does not require separate codecs for playback – video exported to CD or DVD can be played back on any PC. Exporting video footage into this format requires more time than exporting into the AVI format. SiteManager Video Clip File Formats The DVN 5000 supports the following video clip file formats when saving and exporting video footage. NOTE When using the AVI format to export a video clip. 24-10248-56 Rev. For detailed information. Inc. you may save it in one of the following two formats: Compressed JPEG Interchange Format and Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format. MS Mpeg4 V3 AVI Format Saving a Still Image Once you have located the still image of interest. see “Server Setup and Full Interface” on page 3-42. AVI Format DVN native MPEG4 file format. MP4 Format Apple® MPEG4 format. the video will be exported using the recorded video’s resolution and quality. you cannot export the video at 4CIF. See “Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats” on page 3-120 for information about the file formats.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-8: Still Image Features Features Disadvantages JPEG Interchange (compressed) Slight loss of visual quality due to JPEG compression. however. For example. Inc. You can save an image by using the Save button on the camera video screen or by accessing the server full interface window and performing the save procedure in RemoteControl. Exporting video footage into this format requires less time than exporting into the other formats. Windows Bitmap (uncompressed) Large file size. this format requires the JCI DVN codecs when playing back video footage on a PC. The video cannot be upsampled or downsampled. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Exporting video footage into this format requires more time than exporting into the AVI format. 3-121 . © 2011 Johnson Controls. Requires Apple’s QuickTime® media viewer when playing back video footage on a PC.

3. Click Save. You can save a video clip by using the Export tools in the camera video screen. You can save still images either as JPEG or BMP files. or using the Export tools in the view screen. and the Playback commands. you may save it in one of the following formats described on page 3-121. Inc. Access the camera video screen (see page 3-103). If supported by the DVN server. see:   “Server Setup and Full Interface” on page 3-42 “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190 3-122 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. NOTE You cannot export video clips from cameras connected to a DVN 3000 Series server. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click Pause when you locate the still image you wish to save. . which also allows you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously. accessing the server full interface window and performing the saving procedure in RemoteControl. select the desired camera sector from the Sector drop-down list. Saving a Video Clip Once you have located the desired video clip. See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109. Inc. 4. Visual search function. For more information. 5. Save the file to the desired location.SiteManager  To save a still image: VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 1. The Save as dialog box appears. Enter a file name and select the file type you wish to use. 6. 2. You may also double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. Locate the still image by using the Find function.

The sector selected determines the type of panel that appears. See page 3-118. 2. For additional information about the Find function and the playback commands. select the desired camera sector from the Sector drop-down list. 3-123 . click and drag the Index pointer to the start of the video clip you wish to save. then when you click OK on the Find window. see “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. since the camera video screen remains in live mode throughout the procedure. Access the camera video screen (see page 3-103). Inc. Use the Plus and Minus buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale of the camera visual search panel. Index pointer The date and time of the image the Index pointer is on appears in the middle of the camera graphic find panel. If supported by the DVN server. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If you used the Find function.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager    “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102 “The View Screen” on page 3-168  To save a video clip: 1. NOTE You may also save a video clip by using only the Visual search function. click Pause. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Locate the beginning of the video clip you wish to export by using the Find function or the Playback commands. 5. You may also double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. The desired image appears in the camera video screen. 6. the image appears in the camera video screen. Performing this procedure requires you to know the exact date and time of both the start and end points of the video clip you wish to save. paused and ready for playback. If you used the playback commands. when you locate the beginning of the video clip you wish to save. If you are using only the Visual search function. 3. Click the Visual search button . 4.

. click Play. Inc. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands. 9. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. once you have arrived at the desired end point. 3-124 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set start for exported video. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 7. indicating the starting point of the video clip. click Pause. click and drag the Index pointer to the end of the video clip you wish to save. The playback resumes. 8. A green marker appears on the index. allowing you to find the end point of the video clip you wish to export. If you are using only the Visual search function.

Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-125 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager The playback will be paused with the desired image displayed in the camera video screen. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Export video. 11. simply position the pointer on the desired end point and repeat step 10. To shorten or extend the video clip. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. A red marker line appears on the index. Modify the fields on this window according to the following information: Title Enter the preferred title of the video clip you will export. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set end for exported video. 13. indicating the video clip which has been selected for exporting. The Export selection window appears. 10. 12. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

. For detailed information about image resolution. When enabled. as needed. The exact location of the SiteManager folder will be determined by the selections made at the time of SiteManager’s installation. Click OK. To change the destination. Select the preferred compression. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual. Then use the slide bar to select the preferred image resolution.SiteManager Start/End VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Start day and time and end day and time of the video clip. or low. PAL is used in Europe.. User-definable destination where the video file will be saved. Move the slide bar to define the video quality as high. The SiteManager folder is always the default destination for any exported video clips. If the Multicodec AVI compression method is selected.) and select the new location on the Save as dialog box. and the Current Video Resolution check box is deselected. the Quality slide bar will be enabled. For detailed information about authentication. Include text insertion Input video format Compression Resolution File If the camera video includes text insertion information. You may modify the day and time. you may include it with the exported video clip by selecting this check box. Asia. All input formats are enabled by default. 3-126 24-10248-56 Rev. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual. NTSC is the standard typically used in North America. Inc. Quality If you selected the Microsoft MPEG-4 Video Codec V3 AVI option in the Compression drop-down list. select the video format (NTSC or PAL) you wish to use to export the video. Splits the exported video clip into smaller files. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Deselect any format you do not wish to use. For better video performance and quality. medium. and many other parts of the world. . the current video resolution will be used. © 2011 Johnson Controls. an authentication signature will be created for the exported video clip. From the drop-down list. See “Video Clip File Formats” on page 3-121. Fixed split size (MB) Authenticate exported video 14. we recommend selecting the Current Video Resolution check box to use the same format used to record the video. click the Browse button (. Inc.

the following will be displayed in the video export panel. To view the exported video clip. Open container folder – Opens the folder where the exported video will be saved. select Open container folder. select Remove from list. Pause export – Pauses the export process. 24-10248-56 Rev. you may perform the following actions by right-clicking over the export information on the Video export panel: Abort export – Aborts the export process. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The log window will display the video export panel. Once the video clip has been exported. NOTE It may take a few moments before the Abort or Pause command is applied. Inc. 15. • • • To remove the export from the video panel. 3-127 . To open the folder where the video footage has been saved. since the system must complete exporting the current video clip segment before stopping. compression. NOTE The period of time it takes to export a video clip varies. depending on the FPS rate. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager The exporting process will begin. allowing you to monitor the exporting process. resolution. the selected length. You can remove the completed export from the video export panel or view the exported video clip by right-clicking on the export information in the video export panel. and quality of the video clip. During the exporting process. select Open exported file.

to use the window recorder.. Select the Window recorder tab. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. On the Browse for Folder dialog box. From the menu bar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. locate the directory in which you wish to store the video footage from the active camera video screens. See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 for additional information. Select the Window recorder is enabled check box.). Click the Path field’s Browse button (. NOTE We recommend using the Microsoft MPEG-4 video codec when using the window recorder. you must be granted the right to use the window recorder in your account configuration. 3-128 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. . select Tools>Options. Inc. 3. The camera footage is recorded in the . 4.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Configuring the Window Recorder SiteManager allows you to save video footage on a remote client on the fly from any camera being viewed live. Also. NOTE The administrator is the only user who can access the Options window and configure the window recorder. 5. The Options window (General tab) appears.  To configure the window recorder: 1. 2.avi format and is stored in a location specified by the administrator..

Use the Frame rate slide bar to select the desired frame rate (FPS) for the window camera footage. Saving Video Footage on the Fly SiteManager allows you to save video footage and audio at a press of a button while viewing live video footage. This provides you with the advantage of being able to save video footage while still monitoring the live event. NOTE To use the Record button and save video footage and audio while still viewing live footage. 3-129 . Inc. The window recorder is now enabled. 8. 7. Before starting the following procedure. From the Video codec drop-down list. 24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE To return the Window recorder fields to their default settings at any time. Click OK.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 6. See “Configuring the Window Recorder” on page 3-128 for detailed information. When you select the Record button on the camera video screen. Johnson Controls recommends one of the MPEG 4 video codecs. you must be granted the right to use the window recorder in your user account configuration. Click OK or Apply. and users who have been granted the right to use the window recorder at the time of their user account configuration can save video footage from a camera video screen on the fly. video footage and audio are saved until you stop recording. verify that you have configured the window recorder. click the Clear button. 9. The selected path appears on the Options window. select the preferred video compression codec you wish to be applied to the window camera footage. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

and alarms connected to DVN 5000 and DVN 3000 Series servers. © 2011 Johnson Controls. To stop recording. Group Menu Options To manage groups. in order to manage the numerous resources with greater ease and efficiency. you can click the Record button at any time. Click a group in the hierarchy window and select Group from the menu bar. as well as any maps and views included in the SiteManager configuration. map and view hierarchies. This saves considerable navigation and searching time. the playback commands are disabled while the Record button is active. To gain the full benefit from SiteManager. click the Record button again. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Also. 2. This is particularly useful in a multi-server environment where there may be hundreds of cameras and sensors linked to the network. alarm. Inc. and DVN 100-NET encoders. auxiliary. 3. alarm. the functions described in this section are available by performing one of the following actions:   Right-click on the group in the hierarchy window. you can create camera. you can group cameras. Inc. While viewing in live mode. . Access the camera video screen whose video footage you wish to save (see page 3-103). 3-130 24-10248-56 Rev. map and view groups to fit your particular monitoring requirements. auxiliaries. NOTE 3D maps cannot be part of a group. SiteManager allows you to quickly select particular devices through the creation of appropriate camera. The video footage you are currently viewing live will be saved in the location defined by the administrator in the recorder settings configuration. You may also double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To save video footage and audio on the fly: 1. GROUPS With SiteManager. auxiliary. NOTE You will have to click the Groups tab and then click within the hierarchy window to activate the Group functions in the menu bar.

and view groups or combine all five in one group. auxiliary. Allows you to change group names. Allows you to add a new camera. Allows you to remove all cameras. you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. To create or delete a group. auxiliary. Select Group>New group from the menu bar. auxiliaries. 3-131 . map. Disconnects each resource within the selected group from its corresponding server. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click the hierarchy window and click New group. and views for that particular building entrance. Hide Connect Disconnect Add resource Autoconnect Autodisplay Creating a New Group You may custom build your groups to suit your unique monitoring role. Connects each resource within the selected group to the appropriate server. map. alarms. Allows you to display all cameras. This function allows you to monitor all devices involved in monitoring a particular sector. Automatically connects each resource within the selected group to the appropriate server. and views involved in monitoring a particular building entrance. Allows you to delete a group. you can access them all at a click of a mouse. Inc. you may create a “Building Entrance” group that includes all cameras. alarm. © 2011 Johnson Controls. maps. instead of searching through all the server resources trying to locate the cameras. maps and views in the selected group from the virtual video desktop. For example. 24-10248-56 Rev. or view to the group. Click the New group icon in the toolbar. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. Now.  To create a new group: 1. auxiliaries. maps. maps. alarm. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Click the Groups tab. and views in the selected group on the virtual video desktop.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual New group Delete group Edit group Show SiteManager Allows you to create a new group. Automatically displays all the connected camera resources within the selected group in their individual camera video screens. alarms. You can create individual camera. regardless of the server to which they are connected. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. To select the New group option.

You may also talk back to the server by enabling the Talk channel in the hierarchy window and speaking into the microphone connected to the client. . you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. or click the group in the hierarchy window and select Group>Delete group from the menu bar. All the groups that have been created appear in the hierarchy window. Type in the group name. 3-132 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. Adding Group Resources To create a group hierarchy. 2. Right-click on a group in the hierarchy window and click Delete group.SiteManager The Group window appears. You may include any one or all of the following group resources:      Cameras Auxiliaries Alarms Maps Views Audio channels are not available as group resources. Inc. 2. 3. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click the Groups tab. you must add all the resources you wish to have accessible in a particular group. Repeat the previous steps for each new group. Click OK. 3. To add group resources. See “Working with Server Resources” on page 3-46 and “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109. When the confirmation box is displayed click Yes and the group will be deleted from the configuration. The new group appears in the hierarchy window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. You may listen to live audio transmission in the camera video screen or view screen.  To delete a group: 1. The only editing tool is changing group names. VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The same Group window is also displayed when Edit group is selected instead of New group.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To add group resources: SiteManager 1. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. or click the group in the hierarchy window and select Group from the menu bar. 24-10248-56 Rev. 6. 3-133 . Select the resource (type). Click Add resource. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Repeat the same steps until you have completed creating your group. 3. and name of the resource to be added to the group. Inc. 2. server. 5. Right-click on a group in the hierarchy window. Click the Groups tab. You may also access the Resource window by clicking one of the following toolbar buttons: Add camera. Click OK. All the groups that have been created appear in the hierarchy window. The group menu appears. Add aux or Add alarm. Inc. 4. The resource is added to the group and appears in the hierarchy window. The Resource window appears.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. allowing you easy and efficient management of the surveillance resources. SiteManager allows you to edit your resource names. and views. 3-134 24-10248-56 Rev. Refer to DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost mode. maps and views included in the group’s hierarchy on (or from) the virtual video desktop. However. you may name it North Gate.D. Delete resource Allows you to delete a resource from a group. disconnecting one resource automatically disconnects all the resources attached to the same server. © 2011 Johnson Controls. one group may contain resources from many different servers. Allows you to activate or deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. . Inc. Turn on/Turn off Connect / Disconnect Edit resource Set priority Send to monitor Allows you to display the selected camera on the VGA monitor or a network (DVN 100-NET) monitor. thus allowing the camera name to be self-explanatory. Similarly. Connecting one resource automatically connects all the resources attached to the same server. Also allows you to display the selected map or view on the VGA monitor.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Working with Group Resources Working with group resources is very similar to working with server resources. map. auxiliaries. edit. A toggle button that allows you to connect a resource to its server or disconnect a resource from its server. and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. Instead of trying to recall what area Camera 1 from a particular server is monitoring. Displays the Resource properties window. maps.s of cameras. You must be granted the right to use. You can only send a camera. alarms. allowing you to change the name and unique I. or view to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. Allows you to activate the priority boost mode and increase a camera’s FPS rate on demand. Only applies for cameras which are connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. Inc. which is practical and beneficial. Group Resource Menu Options The functions available for managing group resources are: Show/Hide Allows you to display (or remove) cameras.

Click the Plus sign (+) in front of a resource type or double-click the resource type you would like to work with. See Table 3-9 for details. Display the available resources by clicking the Plus sign (+) in front of the group or by double-clicking on the group in the hierarchy window. Repeat until you have displayed all the group resources required. © 2011 Johnson Controls. You may display all the resources simultaneously in the hierarchy window. 2. All the resources of the selected type within the group appear in the hierarchy window. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. The available resources are displayed in the hierarchy window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Resource Status The hierarchy window resource icons display changes according to whether the resource is connected (active) or disconnected (inactive). 3-135 . Table 3-9: Resource Icons Resource Camera – Fixed Camera – Dome Aux Alarm Map View N/A N/A N/A N/A Connected or Active Disconnected or Inactive Disconnected at the Server  To activate and work with a resource: 1. Inc. 3.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 5. as required. To work with a resource. Repeat until you have displayed all the resource types required. or click the resource in the hierarchy window and select Resource from the menu bar. Inc. . See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 for detailed information. some resources may be connected while the others may be disconnected simultaneously. 4. Once you select Show and Turn on. 6. right-click the resource icon. the next time you access the menu. Select and click the required option. You may display all the resource types simultaneously in the hierarchy window. auxiliaries or alarms. 3-136 24-10248-56 Rev. Once you select Connect for cameras. © 2011 Johnson Controls. it will display Disconnect. Use the available camera video screen functions. Inc. See the following definitions: Show (Camera) The selected camera appears in its individual camera video screen. The corresponding resource menu appears. the next time you access the menu. it will display Hide and Turn off respectively.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual As one group may consist of resources from multiple servers.

24-10248-56 Rev. Hide (Camera) Hide (Map) The selected camera’s video screen will no longer be displayed. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-137 . The selected 2D map screen will no longer be displayed. Show (View) The selected view appears in its view screen. Use the available view screen functions. Use the available 2D map screen functions. as required. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. as required. See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 for detailed information.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Show (Map) SiteManager The selected map appears in its 2D map screen. See “Working with 2D Maps” on page 3-150 for detailed information. Inc.

Edit the map settings. A connection will be established with all servers whose resources are part of the map. A connection will be established with the camera’s server.SiteManager Hide (View) Connect (Camera) Connect (Map) Connect (View) Disconnect (Camera) Disconnect (Map) Disconnect (View) Edit resource (Camera) VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The selected view screen will no longer be displayed. SiteManager will disconnect from the camera’s server. SiteManager will disconnect from all servers whose cameras are part of the view. SiteManager will disconnect from all servers whose resources are part of the map. The Resource properties dialog box appears. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. as required. . Edit map The Map dialog box appears. Enter the preferred camera name in the Name field and click OK. See “Creating a New Map” on page 3-146 for detailed information. A connection will be established with all servers whose cameras are part of the view. Inc. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-138 24-10248-56 Rev. Once you have edited the map. click OK.

map or view to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. You must unblank a VGA monitor before camera video can be displayed on it. Send to monitor (Map or View) The Monitor menu appears. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera. A connection will be established with the alarm’s or aux’s server. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Send to monitor (Camera) The Monitor menu appears. The selected aux or alarm will be deactivated. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK. Set priority for a camera The priority boost will be activated for the selected camera and will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. This feature allows you to increase a camera’s FPS rate on demand. Select the VGA monitor on which you wish to display the selected map or view. 2D maps and views can only be displayed on VGA monitors connected to the SiteManager client.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Edit view SiteManager The View dialog box appears. Inc. Turn on Turn off Connect The selected aux or alarm will be activated. 3-139 . © 2011 Johnson Controls. The selected map or view will be added to the VGA monitor hierarchy but will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the VGA monitor. Inc. The SiteManager client will disconnect from the alarm’s or aux’s server. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost. Disconnect 24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE You can only send a camera.

Click Yes. delete. The selected item will be removed from the group. Inc. you are unable to add. You may only listen to live audio transmission by individually enabling the audio channel in the corresponding camera video screen toolbar. Enter the preferred alarm name in the Name field and click OK. Delete resource The Confirmation dialog box appears. Adjust the volume on your speakers. as required. Enter the preferred aux name in the Name field and click OK. If a resource included in the selected group is from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server. then the Connecting to server window appears. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 7. For detailed information. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. • If a resource is not currently connected. or edit them. if required. Use the options.SiteManager Edit resource (Alarm) VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Resource properties dialog box appears. a Connecting to server window appears for each server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. As audio channels are not available as group resources. You must enter your DVN server or DVN 100-NET encoder user name and password to connect the resource. provided that the server to which the selected resource is attached does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. selecting the Show or Turn on functions automatically connects the client to the resource server. see “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20 and “Connecting to the Servers” on page 3-38. • 3-140 24-10248-56 Rev. Edit resource (Aux) The Resource properties dialog box appears. If a group contains resources from multiple servers.

. This section provides information about how to create and work with 2D and 3D maps by importing surveillance site images and then populating them with the available camera. and view resources. and . Allows you to delete a map.prj. as required. . Right-click on the map screen.jpg.lwo. Inc. auxiliary.png.smd. . . edit. group. .tin. Using maps allows you to have a visual representation of each surveillance area and access the resources by simply clicking on the respective icon on the map. which allows you to import a new map and/or change the existing map name. 3-141 .tga. . New 3D map Delete map Edit map Show/Hide 24-10248-56 Rev.wmf.stl and . Accesses the Map window. Resources from multiple servers can be superimposed over the map.bmp.objf. . New map Allows you to create/import a new 2D map. .3ds. Map Menu Options To manage maps.nmf. the functions described in this section are available by performing one of the following actions:     Right-click on the Map icon in the hierarchy window.oct. . alarm. . . . Inc. . and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions.emf.ply. Click a map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar.md3.md2. Right-click on the Map icon in a map screen.ms3d. . Imported 3D maps may be in any one of the following formats: . . © 2011 Johnson Controls.jpeg. Allows you to create/import a new 3D map.bsp. NOTE You have to click the Maps tab and then click within the hierarchy window to activate the Map functions in the menu bar.ico. Imported 2D maps may be in any one of the following formats: . .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager MAPS Maps allow you to easily navigate through a surveillance site and all of its resources. . map. A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) map screens on (or from) the virtual video desktop. A map is simply a 2 or 3 dimensional graphical depiction of a surveillance site. . You must be granted the right to create.obj.gts. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. use. A way to create a particular group of resources is to superimpose them on a map. .

Disconnect Add resource Autoconnect Autodisplay Send to monitor The map menu options are the same as the group menu options. . See the following figure. You may create each 2D map differently.tga image file. allowing you to add a new camera. Only applies for 2D maps. . auxiliary. See “Working with 3D Maps” on page 3-151 for detailed information.emf. 2D map screens are shown on the virtual video desktop and are completely independent from one another. While 2D and 3D maps have identical menu options. There is no limit to the number of 2D map screens that can be displayed simultaneously on the virtual video desktop. Inc. Automatically displays all the connected camera resources on the selected map in their individual camera video screens. The 2D Map Screen Each 2D map screen displays an imported . Opens the Resource window.jpeg. See “Adding Map Resources” on page 3-158 for additional information. with its own unique set of resources. except that editing a map allows you not only to change the map name but also import a new image.wmf. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. . if required. alarm. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc.SiteManager Connect VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Allows you to connect all the resources on a particular map to their appropriate servers. You can only send a map to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. Allows you to display the selected 2D map on the SiteManager client’s VGA monitor. The 2D Map screen can be split into the following:   Viewing area 2D toolbar 3-142 24-10248-56 Rev. or .png.jpg. . Automatically connects each resource on the selected map to the appropriate server. .ico.bmp. Allows you to disconnect all the resources on a particular map from their corresponding server. . The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. or view to the map hierarchy. map. group. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. additional functions are present when working with a 3D map and its resources due to the 3-dimensional environment.

Inc. Opens the Resource window. Buttons and Features (2D Map Toolbar) This section provides a brief description of each feature on the 2D map toolbar. Add camera Add aux Add alarm Add view New 2D map Zoom level Full screen Zoom in Zoom out 1:1 Autozoom Add camera Opens the Resource window. Opens the Resource window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 2D Toolbar Viewing area The 2D Map screen’s Viewing Area displays the map image and all of the map resources. allowing you to add an aux to the map. A view is a unique display of multiple cameras. allowing you to add an alarm to the map. You must be granted the right to create and use resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-143 . allowing you to add a camera to the map. Opens the Resource window. The Resource icons allow you to perform resource specific tasks. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. allowing you to add a view to the map. which Add aux Add alarm Add view 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc.

Allows you to zoom out by 10% each time you click the button.ms3d . auxiliaries.oct . and choose the background color. Allows you to display the 2D map in the original size/resolution. views.objf • • • • • .smd . Automatically resizes the map. 3D toolbar. Zoom level Full screen Zoom in Zoom out 1:1 Autozoom See “Adding Map Resources” on page 3-158 for information about adding cameras. Allows you to display the map across the entire monitor screen. Allows you to select the zoom level for the displayed 2D map. groups. 3D map screens are shown on the virtual video desktop and are completely independent from one another.md3 . zoom in and out. 3-144 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. New 2D map Allows you to create a new 2D map that will be superimposed over the original map.obj . Allows you to zoom in by 10% each time you click the button. © 2011 Johnson Controls.nmf .ply .gts . The 3D Map Screen The 3D map serves the same purpose as the 2D map with some additional functions. with its own unique set of resources. Each 3D map screen displays an imported image file.tin See the following figure.prj .SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual may be custom configured. Inc.bsp . In addition. and maps. you may view the map from different angles and aspects. and Background.stl . There is no limit to the number of 3D map screens that can be displayed simultaneously on the virtual video desktop. alarms. as it is a 3-dimensional object. view the object framework. . as needed.lwo . The following file formats may be imported as a 3D map: • • • • • • . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Clicking the button again returns the SiteManager screen to its normal view. You may create each 3D map differently. The 3D Map screen can be categorized into the Viewing area.3ds . See “Views” on page 3-165 for further information. so that the entire map can be viewed in the current map screen.md2 • • • • • .

The Resource icons allow you to perform resource specific tasks. Reset view Plan View Zoom in Navigation panel Zoom Smooth out shading Flat shading Hidden lines Wireframe Background color Reset view Plan view Zoom in Provides a front view of the object. Buttons and Features (3D Map Toolbar) This section provides a brief description of each feature on the 3D map toolbar. 3-145 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 3D Toolbar Background Viewing Area The 3D Map’s Viewing Area displays the map image and all of the map resources. Allows you to zoom out at a speed predefined in the navigation panel. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. You must be granted the right to create and use resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. The Background is the area of the 3D map that does not contain the image and whose color can be changed. Allows you to zoom in at a speed predefined in the navigation panel. Provides a bird’s eye view of the 3D image. Zoom out 24-10248-56 Rev.

alarms. 3-146 24-10248-56 Rev. For additional information about map screens. perform one of the following actions: • • Right-click the hierarchy window and click New map. you are able to view the map from any angle or aspect you require. the first map created might be the bird’s eye view of an entire airport. Opens the Color window. views. When enabled. Click the New map icon in the toolbar. each one of the 3D object’s polygons will be filled in with a single color. you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. see the following:      “The 2D Map Screen” on page 3-142 “The 3D Map Screen” on page 3-144 “Working with 3D Maps” on page 3-151 “Map Resources” on page 3-155 “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242  To create a 2D map: 1. groups. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. See “Adding Map Resources” on page 3-158 for information about adding cameras. “Complex” shading. Provides the 3D object’s main frame lines. and maps. “Simple” shading. When enabled. See “Working with 3D Maps” on page 3-151 for detailed information. which allows you to select the background color. Click the Maps tab. Creating a New Map In order to create a 2D or a 3D map. For example. auxiliaries. . Provides the 3D object’s graphic skeleton. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the image that will be displayed in the map screen must be imported.SiteManager Navigation panel VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Opens the Navigation panel. Smooth shading Flat shading Hidden lines Wireframe Background color In addition to the zoom in and out tools (which may also be achieved by using the mouse wheel). To select the New map option. The subsequent maps could be individual levels within the airport displayed over the corresponding geographical area on the original map. Inc. The first map created always serves as a base on which you may overlay other maps. which allows you to select the speed with which you may zoom in and/or out when using the zoom tool. each one of the 3D object’s polygons will be filled in using a color gradient. To create or delete a map.

5. Click the image you would like to import. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. The map will also be listed in the hierarchy window. SiteManager The Map window appears. Inc. The selected image appears in the map screen. Click OK. 3-147 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click Open. 3.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual • Select Map>New map from the menu bar. Select the required drive and directory. The Open dialog box appears. 4. Enter the preferred map name in the Name field. The Map window reappears with the selected file name displayed in the image slot. Click the Browse button next to the Image field.

Click the Browse button. Enter the preferred map name in the Name field. Repeat the previous steps for each new map. Click the New 3D map icon in the toolbar. The Map window appears. . To select the New 3D map option. Click the Maps tab. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. 3-148 24-10248-56 Rev. 3.  To create a 3D map: 1. The Open dialog box appears.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 6. 2. Inc. Select Map>New 3D map from the menu bar. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click the hierarchy window and click New 3D map.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Select the required drive and directory. Click Open. The created maps appear in the hierarchy window.  To delete a map: 1. Repeat the previous steps for each new map. Click OK. Click the Maps tab. 3-149 .VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. The map will also be listed in the hierarchy window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 5. Inc. The selected image appears in the map screen. 24-10248-56 Rev. 6. Click the image you would like to import. The Map window reappears with the selected file name displayed in the image slot. Inc.

3. see:    “The 2D Map Screen” on page 3-142 “Map Resources” on page 3-155 “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242  To work with a 2D map: 1. resolution. Click Delete map. Right-click on the Map and select Show in the menu. Working with 2D Maps Changing the 2D map screen size. Inc. Click the Maps tab. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The map menu appears. Display a map by performing one of the following steps: • • • Double-click on the appropriate Map icon in the hierarchy window. Click and drag the Map icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. 2. 3-150 24-10248-56 Rev. see “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160. When the Confirmation box appears. . To work with a 2D map screen’s resources. click Yes and the map will be deleted from the configuration. © 2011 Johnson Controls. For additional information about map screens. Inc. and display is simple. or click a map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar. Right-click a map in the hierarchy window.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2.

All the maps available appear in the hierarchy window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The 2D Map screen appears. perform one of the following actions: • • • Double-click the appropriate Map icon in the hierarchy window. A 3D map may be viewed from numerous positions and angles. Inc. see:     “The 2D Map Screen” on page 3-142 “The 3D Map Screen” on page 3-144 “Map Resources” on page 3-155 “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242  To work with a 3D map: 1. working in a 3-dimensional environment necessarily creates the need for additional features. For information on using the 2D Map toolbar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. For additional information about map screens. In addition. 24-10248-56 Rev. see “The 2D Map Screen” on page 3-142. Click and drag the Map icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. you may choose to work with the map’s framework and skeleton or adjust the map’s shading and background. Click the Maps tab. Working with 3D Maps While the basic functions are maintained for both 2D and 3D maps. 3-151 . Inc. SiteManager 3. Right-click on the Map and select Show in the menu. 2. You may also access a map by double-clicking on a map icon that has been used as a resource on a different map. To display the map. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

You may also zoom out by using the mouse wheel. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. You will zoom out at an increment specified in the navigation panel. The plan view appears. 3. You may also zoom in by using the mouse wheel. Inc. VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual You may also access a map by double-clicking on a map icon that has been used as a resource on a different map. 3-152 24-10248-56 Rev. You will zoom in at an increment specified in the navigation panel. Select one of the following options: The front view of the map appears.SiteManager The 3D map screen appears. Inc. .

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev. The shading will be flat. click the Navigation button again. You may also use the keyboard arrow keys individually or in combination with the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys for shifting and rotations or the click and drag technique with a mouse to maneuver the map. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The shading will be smooth. click and drag the Speed slide bar. SiteManager To adjust the speed (zoom and positioning increment). To remove the navigation panel.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The navigation panel appears. Inc. Inc. Use the arrows individually or in combination with the keyboard <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys for additional rotation and shifting to maneuver the map. 3-153 .

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The Color window appears. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-154 24-10248-56 Rev. See “The 3D Map Screen” on page 3-144 for additional information about the 3D map buttons. as required. click OK.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The map’s main structural lines will be displayed. 4. The map’s framework will be displayed. Inc. Inc. Use the color options. The map appears with the selected background color. Once you have achieved the desired background. .

alarms. views. and maps on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Cameras Auxiliaries Alarms Audio channels1 Talk channels1 • • • • • Groups 2D maps1 Views 3D maps Monitors1 Can only be added to 2D maps. edit and delete resources to access all the functions. 2D and 3D maps. Not available on 2D maps for alarms. Allows you to connect (or disconnect) a resource to (or from) its server. and monitors. Show/Hide A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) camera video screens. Connect / Disconnect Edit resource Set priority 24-10248-56 Rev. Allows you to activate the priority boost mode and increase a camera’s FPS rate on demand. You must be granted the right to use. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. groups. 2D Map Resource Menu Options This section describes the functions available for managing 2D resource options. Connecting one resource automatically connects all the resources attached to the same server.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Map Resources Resources that can be included as part of a map include: • • • • • 1. auxes. talk channels. auxes. Inc. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information. Turn on/Turn off Allows you to activate or deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The number of resources that can be added to any one map is only limited by the number of resources connected to the servers (cameras. 3-155 . audio channels. Not available on 2D maps for talk channels. the number of created resources (groups. disconnecting one resource automatically disconnects all the resources attached to the same server. Inc. and views) and the number of available VGA and network monitors. Similarly. Only applies for cameras which are connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. audio and talk channels). Allows you to change certain resource properties. Only applies to alarms and auxes.

talk channels. Allows you to activate/deactivate auxiliaries and alarms. 3D Map Resource Menu Options This section describes the functions available for managing 3D map resource options. Also allows you to display 2D maps and views on VGA monitors. Displays the Size menu. 3D maps. groups. Allows you to automatically move the selected resource to the exact point or position from which the map is being viewed. Only applies to cameras and views. Allows you to connect (or disconnect) a resource to (or from) its server. Allows you to change certain resource properties. Turn on/Turn off Edit resource Delete resource Connect / Disconnect Set as view point Move to current view point Position locked 3-156 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Show/Hide Allows you to display (or remove) camera video screens and views on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Allows you to delete a resource from a 3D map. allowing you to select the size of the map icon. Inc. right-click on the icon on the 3D map screen. Not available on 2D maps for alarms. and monitors. The function must be disabled in order to reposition the resource. audio channels. Allows you to use the resource as the point from which the entire map is viewed.SiteManager Rotate VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Displays the Rotation menu where you may choose the orientation of the camera icons. Inc. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Size Send to monitor Delete resource Allows you to delete a resource from a map. auxes. To access the resource menu options. Allows you to display a selected camera on VGA or network monitors. Allows you to fix the resources position.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-157 . Inc. Inc. as they do not have resource icons on a 3D map screen. Table 3-10: 2D Map Resource Icons Resource Camera – Fixed Camera – Dome Aux Alarm Audio Talk N/A N/A N/A N/A Connected or Active Disconnected or Inactive Disconnected at the Server Connected or Disconnected or Active or Inactive Group 2D Map View 3D Map Monitor 3D Map Resource Status The resource icons displayed on a 3D map change according to whether the resource is disconnected or connected and either active or inactive. See Table 3-11 for details. 24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE Groups and maps are only represented in the hierarchy window. See Table 3-10 for details. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Map Hierarchy Resource Status and 2D Map Resource Icon Status The hierarchy window resource icons display changes according to whether the resource is connected (active) or disconnected (inactive).

2. See “Views as Map Resources” on page 3-197 for details.  To add map resources 1. You may add resources from all the available servers. A map itself can also become a resource.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-11: 3D Map Resource Icons Resource Aux Connected or Disconnected Camera Alarm View Selected Inactive Active Selected Adding Map Resources Adding map resources is similar to adding group resources. Inc. 3-158 24-10248-56 Rev. you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. Click the Maps tab. The created maps will be displayed in the hierarchy window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Right-click a map in the hierarchy window or click a map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar. . Inc. and a resource may be used simultaneously on a 2D and a 3D map. You may also add views as map resources. 2D and 3D maps use the same resources. To add map resources. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

Use the Resource drop-down list to select the resource type. The specified resource has now been added to the map and will be displayed in the hierarchy window. To add a resource. groups. and monitors can only be added to 2D maps. The map screen appears. 6. 4. Inc. talk channels. 8. the resource icon appears in the hierarchy window. Audio channels. 7. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. but not on the 3D map screen. Click OK. We suggest that you position the map as required before adding the resource(s). use the Server drop-down list to select the server whose resource you wish to add. The resource window appears. 5. then the corresponding resource icon appears in the top left-hand corner of the map screen. Add aux. • • If you added a resource to a 2D map. Click Add resource. It may be necessary to zoom out slightly before you will notice 24-10248-56 Rev. SiteManager 3. or in the 2D map toolbar click Add camera. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If you added a resource to a 3D map. the angle and level of zoom of the map object displayed determines the potential positions of the resource. right-click the viewing area on the map screen. 3-159 . You may also simply double-click the map in the hierarchy window to display the selected map screen. If you added a group. Use the bottom drop-down list to select the resource you wish to add to the map.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The map menu will be displayed (2D map menu shown). If applicable. If you are working with a 3D map. Add alarm or Add view. the corresponding resource icon appears in the center of the map screen. Click Show.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Working with Map Resources While working with map resources is similar to working with server and group resources. © 2011 Johnson Controls. position the resource icon. The map menu appears. See “Working with 3D Maps” on page 3-151. 10.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual the resource icon. and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions available for work with map resources. Right-click a map in the hierarchy window. Once you have added a map resource. Click and drag it to the desired position. 3-160 24-10248-56 Rev. The resources can be physically positioned on a map giving you visual representation of all the cameras. Inc. • If it is a 2D map. auxiliaries. Repeat the previous steps until you have added all the resources you require on the map. you can locate and work with the required resources by simply clicking on the icons within the map screen. Click Show. Bear in mind that the resource icon will change size depending on changes in depth. as they do not have resource icons on a 3D map screen. You must be granted the right to create. . due to the 3-dimensional environment. zoom out slightly so that you can view the entire resource icon in the center of the map screen. 11. It is easier to see. and alarms involved in monitoring a specific area. 9. The map screen appears. use. If it is a 3D map. or click the map in the hierarchy window and select Map from the menu bar. • Repeat the steps until you have added and arranged all the resources for the selected map. See “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160 for information on how to organize the resource icons on a map.  To position and work with map resources: 1. See “Views as Map Resources” on page 3-197 for information on how to work with a view as a resource. there are some additional functions. the resource icons on the map screen if they are connected. Repeat the procedure for each map you wish to add resources to. Groups and maps are only represented in the hierarchy window. edit. simply click and drag the resource icon from the top left-hand corner of the map screen to the desired position. and thus position. You may also select the angle of the camera icon by selecting the desired rotation in the camera resource menu. as required. Inc. Position the icon on the map. Once you have completed configuring a map. 2. as required. 3. Click the Maps tab.

Turn on. 2D map. See the following definitions: Show This function is available with the following options: • • • • Camera Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only) The selected camera video screen. a Server connection window will be displayed for each server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. use the available camera video screen functions. You must enter your DVN 5000. © 2011 Johnson Controls. See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 for detailed information. 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-161 . Select the desired resource type. 3D map. Inc. or click the resource in the hierarchy window and select Resource from the menu bar. Turn off or Disconnect respectively. See “Map Menu Options” on page 3-141 and “View Menu Options” on page 3-166 for additional information. 6. 5. the next time you access the menu it will display Hide. For cameras. Once you select Show. or Connect. If a resource included in a selected map is from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server. The corresponding resource menu appears. group items. If a resource (such as a view) contains resources from multiple servers. Select the required option and click on it. or select and right-click the resource in the hierarchy window. then the Server connection window appears. or view appears. DVN 3000. The following example is a camera video screen. or DVN 100-NET user name and password to connect the resource. Inc. as required. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Right-click the resource icon on the map screen.

3-162 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. . edit the 2D or 3D map settings. Inc. or view will no longer be displayed. and click OK. Disconnect This function is available with the following options: • • • • • • Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only) The SiteManager client will disconnect from the server associated with the selected option. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2D map. Edit resource This function is available with the following options: • • • • • Camera Alarm or auxiliary Group 3D map View If editing a resource for a 3D map. Connect This function is available with the following options: • • • • • • Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only) A connection will be established with the server associated with the selected option. group items. 3D map. as required.SiteManager Hide VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual This function is available with the following options: • • • • Camera Group 2D or 3D map View (2D map only) The selected camera video screen. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager For all other options. 3-163 . Click on the preferred orientation. Inc. The following example is the Resource properties dialog box for a camera. Rotate (2D Map Only) This function is available with the camera option. The priority boost will be activated for the selected camera. Edit the settings. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Edit map (2D Map) This function is available with the map option. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Set priority (2D Map Only) This function is available with the camera option. The Rotation menu appears. Refer to DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost. the Resource properties dialog box appears. Enter the preferred camera name in the Name field and click OK. The View dialog box appears. and click OK. The 2D map or the 3D map dialog box appears. Edit view (2D Map) This function is available with the view option. This feature allows you to increase a camera’s FPS rate on demand. as needed. The priority boost will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK.

or view to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. 2D map. Delete resource This function is available with the following options: • • • • • • • Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View Monitor 3-164 24-10248-56 Rev. You can only send a camera image. 2D map. .SiteManager Size (2D Map Only) VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual This function is available with the following options: • • • • • • • Camera Alarm or auxiliary Audio or talk channel Group 2D or 3D map View Monitor The Size menu appears. Inc. If you selected to display the camera. Enter the preferred size and click OK. or view on a VGA monitor. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera. you must unblank the monitor to see the selected image. Inc. If you select Custom. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the Custom size window appears. or view. Select the preferred icon size. Send to monitor (2D Map Only) This function is available with the following options: • • • Camera 2D map View The Monitor menu appears. 2D map. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

7. selecting the Show or Turn on functions will automatically connect the client to the resource server. Inc. Inc. You can simply double-click on the resource icon to display a camera. or map. The selected resource will be removed from the map. Synchronized multiple camera playback enables you to recreate an entire event or track a person/object with ease and precision. © 2011 Johnson Controls. or turn on audio or talk channels. SiteManager Click Yes. provided that the server to which the selected resource is attached does not require the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. group. enabling you to display map images or play back footage from all the cameras included on the screen using the Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback feature. You may custom build numerous view screens with specific layouts (camera and map arrangements) and thus create particular camera and map groupings. There may be as many as 64 cameras and/or maps displayed simultaneously in a view screen at any one time. VIEWS Views are used to do the following:  Display up to 64 cameras and/or maps on a single screen (client workstation system resources must be able to support this configuration) Perform synchronized multiple camera playback (DVN 5000 servers only) Simultaneously export multiple video clips and audio   SiteManager allows you to display camera or map resources from multiple servers on a custom made view screen. If a resource is not currently connected. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Turn on This function is available with the alarm or auxiliary option The selected alarm or auxiliary will be activated. 3-165 . 24-10248-56 Rev. view. 8. turn on an aux. Turn off This function is available with the alarm or auxiliary option The selected alarm or auxiliary will be deactivated. For example. This feature provides you with an enormous advantage of playing back time-synchronized recorded video footage and lip synchronized audio from all cameras included in a particular view simultaneously.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Confirmation dialog box appears.

a view provides quick access to live viewing of multiple cameras on the map. and Find functions are not functional for cameras connected to DVN 3000 Series servers or DVN 100-NET encoders. the functions described in this section are available by performing one of the following actions:    Right-click on the View icon in the hierarchy window. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Cameras and maps are the only resources that may be used in a view. and time can be exported simultaneously. see:    “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 “Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback” on page 3-113 “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116 In addition. Playback sector selection and find functions are included in views to optimize synchronized multiple camera playback. As a map resource. Any or all of the cameras included in a view screen can be selected and the video footage of interest from the same camera sector. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. For additional information on views as map resources. you may control PTZ camera domes. views allow you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously. . NOTE The View screen’s playback commands. Inc. Inc. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar. Right-click on the view screen. visual search. In addition. thus eliminating the need to access each camera resource individually. date. 3-166 24-10248-56 Rev. see:    “Adding Map Resources” on page 3-158 “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160 “Views as Map Resources” on page 3-197 View Menu Options To manage views. Views can be used as resources on maps. you do not need to waste time searching for a few crucial cameras among hundreds of others. By grouping cameras in this manner. For detailed information.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual you may wish to watch all cameras monitoring one airport terminal or maybe you wish to simultaneously watch one camera from every terminal.

Connects all the camera and map resources to the appropriate server.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager NOTE You have to click the Views tab and then click within the hierarchy window to activate the View functions in the menu bar. Allows you to display a single view screen on the screen. allowing you to create and modify custom view screens. 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Opens the View window. The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. Inc. Disconnects all the camera and map resources from their corresponding server. Opens the Layout menu. allowing you to change the view name. Inc. Allows you to the display the selected view on the SiteManager client’s VGA monitor. edit. Allows you to delete a view. You must be granted the right to create. New view Delete view Edit view Allows you to create a new view. Automatically displays all the connected camera and map resources on the selected view on the view screen. Allows you to select the picture quality. Automatically connects each camera and map resource on the selected view to the appropriate server. Opens the Resource window and allows you to add the cameras or maps you wish to include in the selected view. Show/Hide Connect Disconnect Edit layouts Layout Full screen Quality Add resource Autoconnect Autodisplay Send to monitor See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 for further information. allowing you to set/change the view screen layout. 3-167 . The same occurs upon all subsequent logins. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. This option is only available when the view screen is already displayed. Opens the Layout editor window. and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. use. You can only send a view to a VGA monitor when the monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) view screens on (or from) the virtual video desktop.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Therefore. depending on your design. the view screen will vary in size and appearance. See “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 for detailed information about this unique feature. you are able to custom design the screen layout. Inc. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. with the major distinction of the powerful Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback. The View screen can be split into the following:          Viewing area Master camera Camera or map units Playback commands Sector button Save still image button Visual search button Find button Single resource view button 3-168 24-10248-56 Rev. Unlike the camera video screen. using the visual search function on the view screen allows you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The View Screen The view screen is displayed on the virtual video desktop and may be a simple. The view screen’s flexibility allows you to create a display suited to your particular viewing requirements. Playback commands are the same as for the camera video screen. Inc. single camera screen or a complex display of up to 64 cameras and maps. See the following figure. In addition.

The master camera is the camera with which all other cameras in the view synchronize their playback.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Camera unit Master camera Viewing area Playback commands Sector Single resource view Find Visual search Save still image Buttons and Features (View Screen) The View screen has the following buttons and features: NOTE You must be granted the proper rights to access all the functions listed. Viewing area Displays live or played back video footage of all cameras included in the view. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. Also displays all map resource images. It is also the camera on which any PTZ commands are performed. 3-169 . Inc. See “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 for detailed information. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Master camera Camera or map unit Playback commands 24-10248-56 Rev. An area of the viewing area that displays live or played back video footage of a single camera or the map resource image. Allow you to perform synchronized multiple camera playback.

Time lapse and Alarm. you simply click and drag the desired camera or map from the hierarchy window to the view screen. Group. Enables you to view a single resource on the entire View screen. The viewing area may be divided into a maximum of 64 individual units. Map. View Example 1 View Example 2 View Example 3 Creating a New View Creating a new view is simple and easy. You can use any of the camera or map resources available in the Server. As with maps. see:   “The View Screen” on page 3-168 “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 3-170 24-10248-56 Rev. you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. Inc. See “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190 for detailed information. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the view screen layout may be customized. See the following diagrams. Save still image Visual search Find Single resource view In addition. See “Saving Still Images” on page 3-188 for detailed information.SiteManager Sector VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Allows you to choose to play back video footage from one of the three sectors: Prime. with countless number of unique designs. To create or delete a view. Allows you to find particular still images and video clips by selecting the date and time. or Monitor configurations. There is no limit to the number of view screens you may create or how many times you can display the same camera resource. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Allows you to save still images from the selected resource as either JPEG or BMP files. For additional information about view screens. Allows you to find particular still images and video clips by clicking on the index and export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously by using the index export tools. . Inc.

Select View>New view from the menu bar. 24-10248-56 Rev. The view screen appears and a View icon is added to the hierarchy window. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click a View in the hierarchy window. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click the hierarchy window and click New view. The View menu appears. To access the view menu. Click the Views tab. Inc. 3-171 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. Right-click the view screen. To select the New view option. Click the Views tab. The View dialog box appears. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual “Designing the View Screen Layouts” on page 3-175 “Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps” on page 3-178 “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242 SiteManager     To create a new view: 1. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK. Click the New view icon in the toolbar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2.  To delete a view: 1.

The View menu appears. Show Hide Connect Disconnect 3-172 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. Click Delete view. Applying an option using the View menu affects all the cameras and maps displayed in that particular view screen. Click the Views tab. Working with the View Screen Options Every View screen has its own set of options.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. To work with view screen options. The SiteManager client disconnects from the servers associated with the View’s resources. When the Confirmation box appears. you must be granted the right to use and edit resources based upon your user account configuration. allowing you to work with each view independently. Select one of the following options: Edit view The View dialog box appears. regardless of the server to which they are connected. 2. Right-click the view screen.  To access the View menu and work with the options: 1. Enter the preferred view name in the Name field and click OK. Closes the selected View screen. click Yes and the view will be deleted from the configuration. To access the view menu. and server IP address displayed at the top of the view screen. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The SiteManager client establishes a connection with servers associated with the View’s resources. server name. . Opens the selected View screen. Inc. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click a View in the hierarchy window. The camera currently selected as the master will have its camera name. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar.

etc. right-click on the screen. To return to the normal view. The View quality menu appears.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Edit layouts SiteManager The Layout editor window appears. See “Designing the View Screen Layouts” on page 3-175 for detailed information. User defined quality – Quality is adjusted according to your connection. Maximum speed – As the images are of satisfactory quality. Inc. but as a result you are using up more computer resources (CPU. Full screen The selected view is displayed across the entire monitor screen. The refresh rate is higher. and click Full screen again. © 2011 Johnson Controls.). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. fewer computer resources are used. Layout The Layout menu appears. Quality You may choose one of the following picture quality settings for each view screen: • Maximum quality – The images are of maximum high quality. 24-10248-56 Rev. bandwidth. The refresh rate is lower. 3-173 . Inc. • • Add resource The Resource dialog box appears.

The view will be displayed on the VGA screen and the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden behind the view. Inc. The same will occur upon all subsequent logins. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the view. You can only send a view to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. Click OK. 3-174 24-10248-56 Rev. Send to monitor The Monitor menu appears. . Repeat the process for each camera or map you wish to add to the view. The cameras and maps will be automatically displayed on the view screen. Position the camera or map on the view screen as needed. See page 3-180. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Autodisplay NOTE Enabling the Autoconnect and Autodisplay functions on multiple SiteManager clients attempting to connect to a large number of cameras (all on the same network) may delay the application during start-up if any connection issues arise during the process. Views can only be displayed on the SiteManager client’s VGA monitors. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Autoconnection The cameras and maps will be automatically connected to their corresponding server. The selected view will be added to the VGA monitor hierarchy but will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the monitor.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Select the server and the resource by using the Server and the bottom drop-down list respectively. Inc. The same will occur upon all subsequent logins. The selected camera or map appears in one of the camera/map units on the view screen.

As there are countless camera and map arrangement options. then the Connecting to server window will be displayed. the bigger the resolution on the view screen. see “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20 and “Connecting to the Servers” on page 3-38. Each individual viewing area may consist of 1. Click Edit layouts. The View menu appears. For detailed information. edit. The higher the number of units selected. See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 for further information about the View menu. you must be granted the right to create. DVN 3000. use. or 16 units. if it is surrounded by two or more selected units. However. Right-click the view screen. Click the Views tab. Each square represents a single unit. You do not have to use all the available units. If a unit is left unselected. To design a view. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click a View in the hierarchy window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager NOTE If the cameras included in the selected view are from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server. 2. The Layout editor window appears. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. as well as their viewing size and arrangement. You will be required to enter your DVN 5000. 3-175 . Inc.  To design a view screen layout: 1. If the view contains cameras from multiple servers. To access the view menu. it will be 24-10248-56 Rev. The Layout editor allows you to choose the number of cameras and maps that will be displayed on each view screen. it will not be shown on the view screen. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar. Inc. each view screen can be designed to specifically suit your viewing requirements. or DVN 100-NET user name and password to view the cameras. a Connecting to server window will be displayed for each server which requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. Designing the View Screen Layouts You may custom design all the view screen layouts. and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 9. 4.

SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual shown on the view screen as a blank (black) area that cannot display a camera or map. If you wish for 16 units to be one individual camera or map (displaying up to 4 different cameras and/or maps). repeatedly click New 2x2 or click a single unit and drag it to the next diagonal unit. 5. Each square will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit. 3. Inc. repeatedly click New 4x4 or click a single unit and drag it to the fourth diagonal unit. . click each square once or repeatedly click New 1x1. Inc. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit. 4. repeatedly click New 3x3 or click a single unit and drag it to the third diagonal unit. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit. 6. 3-176 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If you wish for 9 units to be one individual camera or map. If you wish for each unit to be an individual camera or map (displaying up to 64 different cameras/maps). Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual unit. If you wish for 4 units to be one individual camera or map (displaying up to 16 different cameras and/or maps). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

click Rename. or click and drag the units as required. All layouts designed are automatically saved and may be accessed and applied to any view screen. 3x3 and 4x4. The selected unit will be deleted. we recommend designing a few different layouts. click the unit to be deleted and click Delete in the frame area of the window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Each merged unit will turn yellow and then white with a sequential number indicating that it has been enabled as an individual viewing area. allowing you to create a different unit configuration in its place. The Layout window appears. 9. A new layout will be shown in the name box and a new unit area will be displayed. click New 1x1. NOTE As there is no limit on the number of layouts that may be designed. You will be returned to the view screen. Inc. 12. 10. Inc. If you wish to create a combination (there are literally hundreds of options). click New. To create a new layout. click Done. To assign a particular name to the layout. © 2011 Johnson Controls. OR 8. so that you do not have to keep returning to the Layout editor window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 7. as required. Once you have achieved the required layout(s). select the layout from the drop-down list and click Delete in the layout area of the window. 24-10248-56 Rev. 11. The layout will be deleted. To delete a unit. To delete a layout. Type the name and click OK. 3-177 . 2x2.

and/or maps. The view screen will be configured accordingly. The View menu appears. Select a view icon in the hierarchy window and select View from the menu bar. See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 for further information about the View menu. Inc.  To add cameras or maps to a View screen: 1. © 2011 Johnson Controls.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 13. 3-178 24-10248-56 Rev. Access the View menu again and select the Layout option by performing one of the following actions: • • • Right-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window and click Layout. you must be granted the right to create and delete resources based upon your user account configuration. The Layout menu appears. and you may use the same layout on different view screens. Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps Camera and map resources can be added by clicking and dragging them from the previously built hierarchies or maps to the View screen. Right-click the View screen. 15. Inc. 14. Attach cameras and/or maps by following steps on page 3-178. To access the View menu. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click the Views tab. groups. Click a layout. NOTE You may change the layout of a view screen as often as you like. Cameras must be connected in order to be displayed on a view screen. You may choose to add the resources from servers. All of your currently available layouts will be displayed with their corresponding names. perform one of the following actions: • • • Right-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. To add and remove a camera or map on a view screen. . Right-click the view screen and click Layout. Select View>Layout from the menu bar. See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 for further information about the View menu.

Access the camera or map resources you wish to add to the view screen by clicking on the Server. or Map tab. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Group. 3-179 . 24-10248-56 Rev. Click Show. group or map hierarchy appears in the hierarchy window. The server. the playback commands will be displayed at the bottom of the view screen and the camera’s name.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. 4. see: • • • “Connecting to the Servers” on page 3-38 “Working with Group Resources” on page 3-134 “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160 Once a camera is added to the view. Click and drag the desired camera or map to a unit on the view screen. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Display all the cameras or maps available in a particular hierarchy by clicking the Plus sign (+) in front of the Camera or Map icon. Inc. SiteManager 3. The view screen appears. Ensure that the camera resources are connected. and server IP address will be displayed at the top of the view screen. server name. The camera or map will be displayed on the view screen and added to the view in the hierarchy window. For connecting camera resources.

7. See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 5. click and drag the map camera icon to the View screen. Move. Zoom. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click the Views tab. simply click and drag one camera or map to the other’s viewing area. Either use the mouse cursor or right-click the particular camera unit and access the menu. 6. Once you have added all the cameras or maps.    To remove a camera or map resource from the View screen: 1. Inc. simply click and drag it to a different viewing area. The camera or map will be displayed in a new unit. 3-180 24-10248-56 Rev.  The view layout has to have enough free units for the cameras or maps to be displayed when they are added to the view. To control PTZ cameras. See “Designing the View Screen Layouts” on page 3-175 for information about changing the screen layout. double-click on the particular camera unit. The cameras and/or maps will swap places. To position a camera or map in a new unit. Iris. To swap camera and/or map places on the screen. 8. See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Options” on page 3-103 for details about the Quality. . you may again wish to change camera or map positions or choose a different layout. Cameras or maps may also be added by selecting View>Add resource from the menu bar. Focus. To add cameras directly from a map screen. Repeat the same steps until you have added all the required cameras or maps to the view screen. Click and drag the next camera or map you wish to add to the view. Preset and Tour options. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. use. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. NOTE You must be granted the right to create. therefore. the Set priority option will also be available in the Camera resource menu. Click Yes. 24-10248-56 Rev.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 2. 5. Inc. Working with View Resources Views can only use cameras or maps as a resource. The Confirmation box appears. or clicking the camera or map in the hierarchy window and selecting Resource from the menu bar. The camera or map will be deleted from the hierarchy and will no longer be displayed on the View screen. and if the camera is connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server. 3-181 . Click Delete resource. Inc. All the available cameras or maps will be displayed in the hierarchy window.  To work with view resources: 1. The resource menu appears. the following instructions only describe how to work with the cameras and maps included in a view. Click the Views tab. Display all the cameras or maps available on the view screen by clicking on the Plus sign (+) in front of the View and the Camera or Map icons. edit and delete resources to access all the functions available for work with view resources. See “Working with Group Resources” on page 3-134 for information about the resource menu. 3. Access the resource menu by right-clicking on the camera or map in the hierarchy window. If removing a camera resource. 4.

2. Inc. Right-click on the required camera or map in the hierarchy window. or select the required camera or map in the hierarchy window and click Resource on the menu bar. Double-click on (or click the Plus sign [+] in front of) the View icon whose cameras or maps you wish to access. 3-182 24-10248-56 Rev. Then select one of the following options: Show The selected camera or map will be displayed in its individual video screen. as required. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. As one view may consist of cameras from multiple servers. See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 for detailed information. Inc. 3. All of the cameras and maps included in the view appear.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual All the created views appear in the hierarchy window. . some resources may be connected while the others may be disconnected simultaneously. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Camera Video Screen Map Screen Use the available video screen functions.

The SiteManager client will disconnect from the server associated with the View’s camera or map.. Inc. Click OK. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. and clicking Open. Edit map The Map dialog box appears.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Hide (Camera) Connect SiteManager Closes the selected camera’s video screen. The SiteManager client establishes a connection with server associated with the View’s camera or map. Enter the preferred map name in the Name field. The priority boost will remain active until you stop the priority boost mode by clicking Set priority again. Select the map image file by clicking the Browse (. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.) button. The priority boost will be activated for the selected camera. Set priority This feature allows you to increase a camera’s FPS rate on demand. 24-10248-56 Rev.. Disconnect Edit resource (Camera) Enter the preferred camera name in the Name field and click OK. locating and selecting the map image file. Refer to the DVN 5000 Series Software Installation and Configuration Manual for additional information about the priority boost. 3-183 . The Resource properties dialog box appears.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. especially when more than one camera is used for surveillance of a site. Inc.SiteManager Send to monitor VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Monitor menu appears. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The selected camera will be removed from the group. You can only send a camera or map to a VGA monitor when the VGA monitor is not in the sequence resource mode. see: • • • • “Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback” on page 3-113 “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116 “Views” on page 3-165 “Adding and Removing Cameras or Maps” on page 3-178    3-184 24-10248-56 Rev. the selected camera or map will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the monitor. Synchronized multiple camera playback enables you to recreate an entire event or track a person/object with ease and precision. when performing synchronized multiple camera playback. Delete resource Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. the Set priority option will also be available in the camera resource menu. You must be granted the right to use resources based upon your user account configuration to use synchronized multiple camera playback. This can be time consuming and often fails to supply the global picture of an event. and time. If you select to display the camera or map on a VGA monitor. date. Note the following:  Remember that each camera may be uniquely configured with regard to recording time intervals and sectors. . Synchronized multiple camera playback can only be performed in views and not in individual camera video screens. Select the monitor on which you wish to display the selected camera or map. you must view video footage for each camera separately. See “Working with Group Resources” on page 3-134 for information about the Camera resource menu. Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback Playing back recorded video footage undoubtedly provides you with certain benefits. Therefore. Inc. some cameras may not display video footage for the selected sector. Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback eliminates the need for individual camera footage viewing and provides you with an enormous advantage of playing back time-synchronized recorded video footage and audio from all cameras included in a particular view simultaneously. However. For additional information. If the camera is connected to a DVN 5000 multiplexed server.

24-10248-56 Rev. then the Connecting to server window appears. You will be required to enter your DVN 5000. Double-click on a View icon on a 2D map or a 3D map screen. If the cameras included in the selected view are from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server. Double-click on a View icon on a map. Right-click a View in the hierarchy window and click Show.   To perform synchronized multiple camera playback: 1. the playback commands and the find function will be enabled. see “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20 and “Connecting to the Servers” on page 3-38. For detailed information. the playback commands and the find function will be disabled.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Important Information   Cameras connected to DVN 3000 Series servers will not be played back. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-185 . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. To display a view screen. Inc. a Connecting to server window appears for each server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. Cameras connected to DVN 100-NET encoders will not be played back. DVN 3000. as these encoders only transmit live video footage. If a camera connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder or a DVN 3000 server is selected as the master camera. On the View screen. displaying the View screen results in an automatic connection to all the necessary servers. or DVN 100-NET user name and password to view the cameras. Inc. click the camera you wish to be the master camera of the playback. Click the Views tab. perform one of the following actions: • • • • • • • Double-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. Ensure that you have completed the View screen by specifying its layout and adding all the cameras required. If you are not currently connected to the server(s). • • 2. Click a view in the hierarchy window and select View>Show from the menu bar. As soon as a camera connected to a DVN 5000 server is selected as the master camera. The View screen appears. The selected camera displays a red outline. If the view contains cameras from multiple servers.

4. Inc. select Time Lapse. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. From the Sector drop-down list in the toolbar.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Master camera The remaining cameras in a view synchronize their playback with the master camera. Therefore. The Time lapse sector video footage will be ready for playback and the Sector button will change its display. time. Inc. To play back the Prime sector. particular cameras may not have any footage to play back. the rest of the cameras will only play back the video and audio footage that corresponds to the date. 6. To play back the Alarm sector. . the Prime sector is always set as the default sector for the synchronized multiple camera playback. select the sector from which you would like to view video footage. When the master is playing back footage from a particular date. time. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-186 24-10248-56 Rev. To play back the Time lapse sector. The Alarm sector video footage will be ready for playback and the Sector button will change its display. Each time a view is opened. select Prime. at certain points during the playback. select Alarm. 7. and sector specifications of the master camera. 5. and sector. 3. The Prime sector video footage will be ready for playback and the Sector button will display the Prime sector icon.

click the End button. The synchronized multiple camera playback will commence from the start of the video footage of the master camera sector that has been selected. See “Audio Channels” on page 3-53 for detailed information. click the Start button. You may use the find or visual search functions to select the video footage to be played back. Inc. As some cameras may have been programmed to record only at certain time intervals. 11. 9. Inc. along with the corresponding video footage. To go to the start of recorded video footage. © 2011 Johnson Controls. As a result. Ensure that the speakers are connected and the volume at the required level. right-click the Forward button. a black screen will be displayed while the other cameras are performing the synchronized multiple camera playback. To go to the end of recorded video footage. When the playback arrives at a point where a camera recorded video footage and/or audio. If you wish to increase the speed of the fast forward function. the synchronized multiple camera playback will commence from the start of the Prime sector video footage of the master camera. these cameras may not have any recorded footage during the synchronized playback. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager If you skip steps 3 and 5 (or 6) and simply click the Play button after selecting the master camera. To fast forward the video clip. See “Selecting a Camera Sector for Playback” on page 3-113 for additional information. it will be displayed. 10. 8. repeatedly right-click the 24-10248-56 Rev. See “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116 for detailed information about the Find functions. Click the Play button. 3-187 . 12. Audio will be played back automatically where it has been recorded.

Inc. 3-188 24-10248-56 Rev. 17. To export any video clips. Select a view in the hierarchy window and select View>Show from the menu bar. 20. Playback will stop at the chosen point in the video clip to let you view a still image. To play back frame by frame. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 13. click the Stop button. If you wish to increase the speed of the rewind function. When you locate the still image of interest. click the Pause button. To slow down again. To return to live viewing. Right-click on a view in the hierarchy window and click Show in the View menu. 19.  To save a still image on the View screen: 1. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. To save still images. right-click the Rewind button. hold down Rewind or Forward using a left click of the mouse. right-click Rewind or Forward. To pause the video clip. Inc. 16. as required. 15. you may save it in one of the following two formats: Compressed JPEG Interchange Format and Uncompressed Windows Bitmap Format. To resume. To slow down again.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Forward button until you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). 18. Playback will cease and live footage will be displayed on the View screen. as required. To fast rewind the video clip. 14. right-click the Rewind button. right-click the Forward button. click the Pause button and then repeatedly click Rewind or Forward to move through the video clip frame by frame. repeatedly right-click the Rewind button until you reach the required speed (2 xs to 512 xs). Click the Views tab and perform one of the following steps: • • • Double-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. You may repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master. Saving Still Images SiteManager enables you to save a still image of interest from a camera resource on the View screen. To temporarily fast forward or rewind. or click the Play button. see “Saving Still Images” on page 3-188. see “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190.

Inc. 5. You can save still images either as JPEG or BMP files. Inc. 4. Enter a file name and select the file type you wish to use. © 2011 Johnson Controls. See “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109. 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-189 . and the Playback commands. Locate the still image by using the Find function. 3. The Save as dialog box appears. Save the file to the desired location.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The view screen appears. Visual search function. SiteManager 2. Select the camera that has the image you wish to save. Click the Save icon. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click Pause when you locate the still image you wish to save. 6.

Views allow you to export video footage from multiple cameras in one of the following three formats:    AVI Format MP4 Format MS Mpeg4 V3 Format NOTE When using the AVI format to export a video clip. Any or all of the cameras included in a view screen can be selected and the video footage of interest from the same camera sector. . since these encoders only transmit live video footage and audio. This provides the user with the advantage of having quick and easy access to video footage from multiple cameras in parallel. you cannot export the video at 4CIF. The video cannot be upsampled or downsampled. you cannot export video clips from cameras connected to DVN 100-NET encoders.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Saving Video Clips SiteManager allows you to export multiple video clips from different cameras simultaneously. and time exported simultaneously.  To save video clips: 1. see:      “Server Setup and Full Interface” on page 3-42 “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122 “Working with the Camera Video Screen Toolbar” on page 3-109 “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102 “The View Screen” on page 3-168 See also “Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats” on page 3-120 for information about the file formats. Inc. For further information. Click the Views tab and perform one of the following steps: • Double-click on a View icon in the hierarchy window. NOTE You cannot export video clips from cameras connected to a DVN 3000 Series server. Inc. 3-190 24-10248-56 Rev. the video will be exported using the recorded video’s resolution and quality. In addition. date. In addition. if the video was recorded at 2CIF. For example. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the time required to export all of the required video footage is drastically reduced.

The number of rows depends on the number of cameras included in the view screen. 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click the Visual search button The visual search panel appears. The view screen appears. • • The blue index represents the recorded video footage. 3-191 . Inc. . 3.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual • • SiteManager Right-click on a view in the hierarchy window and click Show in the View menu. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Select a view in the hierarchy window and select View>Show from the menu bar. Select the desired camera sector from the Sector drop-down list. Inc. Also. you may double-click the required camera icon on a 2D or a 3D map. 2.

4. . click on the camera you wish to be the master camera of the playback. click and drag the Index pointer to the start of the video clips you wish to save. Cameras whose video footage you do not wish to export can still be used as the master during playback. Inc. since the View screen remains in live mode throughout the procedure.SiteManager • • • • VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The names on the left-hand side of the index indicate the camera to which each index row belongs. The date and time in the upper right-hand corner indicate the end of the available recorded video footage. When the master is playing back footage from a particular date. and sector specifications of the master camera. 7. NOTE You may also save video clips by using only the Visual search function. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Use the Plus (+) and Minus (-) buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale of the visual search panel. The remaining cameras in the view synchronize their playback with the master camera. The date and time in the upper left-hand corner indicate the beginning of the available recorded video footage. the rest of the cameras will only play back the video and audio footage that corresponds to the date. at certain points during the playback. Performing this procedure requires you to know the exact date and time of both the start and end points of the video clips you wish to save. If you are using only the Visual search function. Inc. On the View screen. 3-192 24-10248-56 Rev. time. The date and time in the middle indicate the date and time of the video footage as currently selected by the pointer. particular cameras may not have any footage to play back. Select the check box next to those cameras whose video footage you wish to export. 6. time and sector. The selected camera will display a red outline. Therefore. 5. Index pointer The date and time of the image the Index pointer is on will be displayed in the middle of the camera graphic find panel. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Locate the beginning of the video clip(s) you wish to export by using the Find function or the playback commands.

If you are using the Find function or the playback commands. 3-193 . Use the playback functions. The playback will resume. click Pause. click Play. 11. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set start for exported video. Inc. If you are using only the Visual search function. If you used the Find function. A green marker appears on the index. Inc. indicating the starting point of the video clip(s). see “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” on page 3-116 and “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager For additional information about the Find function and the playback commands. The desired image will be displayed in the View screen. click and drag the Index pointer to the end of the video clips you wish to save. when you locate the beginning of the video clip(s) you wish to save. then when you click OK on the Find window. the image will be displayed in the View screen. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 8. 10. 9. allowing you to find the end point of the video clip(s) you wish to export. If you used the playback commands. 24-10248-56 Rev. paused and ready for playback. if applicable and as needed.

13. . once you have arrived at the desired end point. For detailed information about playback commands.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual During the playback. 14. Inc. If you are using the Find function or the playback commands. The playback will be paused with the desired image displayed in the view screen. © 2011 Johnson Controls. see “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114. The Export selection window appears. 12. position the pointer on the desired end point and repeat step 13. Inc. 3-194 24-10248-56 Rev. indicating the video clip(s) that have been selected for exporting. click Pause. A red marker line appears on the index. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Export video. Right-click on the Index pointer and select Set end for exported video. 15. you may use the scroll bar or the index pointer to move through the recorded footage with greater speed and ease. To shorten or extend the video clip(s). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

. See “Exporting Image and Video Clip Formats” on page 3-120 for detailed information about the video clip formats. click the Browse button (. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 16. All input formats are enabled by default. Start day and time and end day and time of the video clip(s). User-definable destination where the video file will be saved. 3-195 .) and select the new location on the Save as dialog box. Deselect any format you do not wish to use. 24-10248-56 Rev. You may modify the day and time. as needed. Inc. File Include text insertion Input video format Compression If the video clip(s) include text insertion information.. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The exact location of the SiteManager folder is determined by the selections made at the time of SiteManager installation. you may include it with the exported video clip(s) by selecting this check box. Inc. The SiteManager folder is always the default destination for any exported video clips. Select the preferred compression. To change the destination. Modify the fields on this window according to the following information: Title Start/End Enter the preferred title of the video clip(s) you will export.

The log window will display the video export panel. the current video resolution will be used. Click OK. an authentication signature will be created for the exported video clip. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual. The exporting process will begin. medium. Open container folder – Opens the folder where the exported video will be saved. If the Multicodec AVI compression method is selected. 3-196 24-10248-56 Rev. Fixed split size (MB) Authenticate exported video 17. Inc. . or low.SiteManager Resolution VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual From the drop-down list. Quality If you selected the Microsoft MPEG-4 Video Codec V3 AVI option in the Compression drop-down list. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. refer to the DVN 5000 Series or DVN 3000 Series Software User Manual. Pause export – Pauses the export process. the Quality slide bar will be enabled. Then use the slide bar to select the preferred image resolution. select the video format (NTSC or PAL) you wish to use to export the video. Splits the exported video clip into smaller files. Inc. For better video performance and quality. © 2011 Johnson Controls. For better video performance and quality. For detailed information about image resolution. Move the slide bar to define the video quality as high. we recommend selecting the Current Video Resolution check box to use the same format used to record the video. and the Current Video Resolution check box is deselected. For detailed information about authentication. we recommend selecting the same format used to record the video. allowing you to monitor the exporting process. During the exporting process. When enabled. you may perform the following actions by right-clicking over the export information on the Video export panel: Abort export – Aborts the export process.

Views as Map Resources Once you have created a view screen. giving you immediate access to all cameras involved in monitoring Terminal 1 at a click of a mouse. depending on the FPS rate. 3-197 . To add views to maps.  To add a view to a map screen: 1. select Open exported file. the selected length. you may attach it to a 2D or a 3D map. right-click on the export information of the video clip you wish to view in the Video export panel and access the Export menu. 18. © 2011 Johnson Controls. You may attach as many view screens. resolution and quality of the video clip. select Remove from list. For example. To open the folder where the video footage has been saved. Click the Maps tab. select Open container folder. Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager NOTE It may take a few moments before the Abort or Pause command is applied. To remove any of the completed exports from the Video export panel. Once the first video clip has been exported. You could insert this view as a resource on the airport map. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. NOTE The period of time it takes to export a video clip varies. you may have added all cameras from the airport Terminal 1 to one view screen. compression. since the system must complete exporting the current video clip segment before stopping. The camera video screen is still paused on the end point of the exported video clip. 19. For additional information see “Adding Map Resources” on page 3-158 and “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160. as required. you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration. To view the exported video clip. The created maps appear in the hierarchy window. • • • To remove the export from the video panel. the next video clip in the sequence will be exported. 24-10248-56 Rev. or to view the exported video clips.

3. . perform one of the following steps: NOTE The Send to monitor option will not be available if you right-click on a 3D map. Right-click the map in the hierarchy window and click Add resource. To add a view via the Map menu. click the Views tab. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. All the views that have been created appear in the hierarchy window. Select View from the Resource drop-down list. 4. Skip to step 6. Right-click on the Map and select Show in the menu. Inc. Select the view you wish to add and click OK. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click the map in the hierarchy window and select Map>Add resource from the menu bar. Click and drag the Map icon from the hierarchy window to the virtual video desktop. The Resource window appears. Right-click the map screen and click Add resource. To add a view via the Views tab. The view icon will be displayed on the map screen and added to the map hierarchy.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2. Display the map by performing one of the following steps: • • • • • • Double-click the appropriate Map icon in the hierarchy window. 3-198 24-10248-56 Rev.

Continue with step 6. and delete resources based upon your user account configuration to have access to all of the functions listed in this section. and views included in SiteManager. 2D maps. Click and drag the View icon across to the desired position on the map screen. See “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 for additional information. edit. Select the name of the view you wish to add. 5. 6. The Resource window appears. SiteManager supports two types of monitors:   Client VGA monitors connected to the SiteManager client Network monitors (monitors connected to DVN 100-NET decoders that the SiteManager client connects to via a TCP/IP connection) Both monitor types allow you to view live video footage and listen to live audio. Position the view icon on the map screen. Double-click the view icon on the map screen to display the view screen. Skip to step 6. as required. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. as well as play back video footage and audio from any sector individually or as part of a synchronized multiple monitor playback. use. To add a view via the Add view button (for 2D maps only). Inc. Repeat the previous steps until you have added all the desired cameras to the map screen. Click OK. You can play back recorded video footage and audio of a single camera or perform synchronized multiple camera playback on VGA monitors. See “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160 for information about icon positioning. MONITORS This section provides information about VGA and network monitors used to display cameras. The view icon will be displayed on the map screen and added to the map hierarchy. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The view icon will be displayed on the map screen and added to the map hierarchy. 7. 24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE You must be granted the right to create. 3-199 . Inc. click the Add view button on the 2D map screen toolbar.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager The map screen will still be displayed on the virtual video desktop.

the selected VGA monitor must be in the sequence mode. this feature allows you to view a single resource (camera. Right-click on the Sequence or the Sequence screen. map. SiteManager supports multiple VGA monitors. Inc. To add resources to a VGA monitor’s sequence. or view to the selected VGA monitors.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Monitor Menu Options To manage monitors. Edit monitor Opens the VGA monitor window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. map or view) or the VGA monitor’s resource sequence from the selected VGA monitor and use the SiteManager GUI (Graphical User Interface) on the VGA monitor. 2D maps. allowing you to: • • • Change the VGA monitor name Enable or disable the VGA monitor Enable the sequence mode for the VGA monitor Blank When deselected. To activate the Monitor functions in the menu bar. Monitor Menu Options for Client VGA Monitors The following information covers the available monitor menu options for client VGA monitors. and views to the selected VGA monitor’s sequence. map or view) or the VGA monitor’s resource sequence on the selected VGA monitor. 3-200 24-10248-56 Rev. Sequence resource mode only. The same occurs upon your next login. Opens the Resource dialog box and allows you to add cameras. . Inc. Add resource to sequence Autodisplay Automatically displays the connected cameras on the selected VGA monitor. you may perform one of the following actions:     Right-click on the Monitor icon in the hierarchy window. Select a monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor in the menu bar. Show resource Single resource mode only. See “Editing Monitors” on page 3-206 for details. Opens the Resource dialog box and allows you to add one camera. this feature allows you to hide the single resource (camera. When selected. Right-click on a monitor on the Monitor Group screen. click on the Monitors tab and then click within the hierarchy window. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. allowing you to change the network monitor name and the IP address. select Window and verify that Show monitors panel is selected. Allows you to remove a network monitor. The available VGA monitors will be automatically detected by the SiteManager client according to the number of available VGA monitors. allowing you to add a network monitor. Allows you to access the Setup screen of the DVN 100-NET decoder. which is connected to the analog network monitor. The number of monitor groups available depends on how you have grouped the available monitors. SiteManager supports multiple network (DVN 100-NET) monitors. and configure the decoder. Inc. The same occurs upon your next login. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. which is connected to the analog network monitor. Refer to the DVN 100-NET Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information about configuring DVN 100-NET decoders. 3-201 . Delete monitor Edit monitor Setup monitor Show camera Opens the Resource dialog box. allowing you to select the camera you wish to display on the selected network monitor. will automatically connect to the camera’s server. The Monitor panel can be categorized into the following areas:   Monitors drop-down list Network (DVN 100-NET) monitor section 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. New monitor Opens the Network monitor window. To view the Monitor panel. The DVN 100-NET decoder. The number of network monitors is determined by the number of DVN 100-NET decoders and analog monitors available on the network. from the menu bar. Opens the Monitor window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Menu Options for Network (DVN 100-NET) Monitors The following information covers the available menu options for network (DVN 100-NET) monitors. Autoconnect The Monitor Panel The Monitor panel allows you to access all monitors (VGA and network) and monitor groups that are part of the SiteManager configuration. The number and type of available monitors depend on the available hardware on the SiteManager client and the network. as required. You may add or remove Network monitors from the SiteManager configuration.

The DVN 100-NET decoder. You must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration to access all the functions. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If the monitor is currently in quad view mode. will connect to the camera’s server and display the camera’s video footage on the monitor. and whether the monitor is currently in single or quad view mode. which is connected to a spot monitor. Monitors Drop-down List Lists all the available monitors and monitor groups. and allows you to select which monitor sections you wish to display on the Monitor panel.SiteManager Client VGA monitor section Monitor panel find VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual    Monitor panel playback commands Monitors drop-down list Network (DVN 100-NET) monitor section Client VGA monitor section Monitor panel playback commands Monitor panel find Buttons and Features (Monitor Panel) The following information covers each feature on the Monitor panel. See “Using the Connect 3-202 24-10248-56 Rev. camera name. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. the server to which the camera is connected. Inc. Network (DVN 100-NET) Monitor Monitor and resource info Displays the monitor name. . you may connect specific regions by clicking the drop-down arrow and selecting the region(s) you wish to connect.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227 for more information.
Disconnect

The DVN 100-NET decoder, which is connected to a spot monitor, will disconnect from the camera’s server, and the camera’s video footage will no longer be displayed on the monitor. If the monitor is currently in quad view mode, you may disconnect specific regions by clicking the drop-down arrow and selecting the region(s) you wish to disconnect. See “Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227 for more information.

Sector

Allows you to choose to play back video footage from one of the three sectors: Prime, Time lapse and Alarm. Allows you to turn the DVN 100-NET decoder audio output on or off. A dynamic indicator showing the current monitor mode: live, playback, paused, etc.

Audio

Monitor mode

Client VGA Monitor
Monitor and resource info

Displays the following: • • Monitor name Camera name and the server to which the camera is connected when a camera is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy Map name when a map is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy or View name when a view is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy

• •
Unblank

Allows you to display the resources (cameras, maps or views) on the VGA monitor. Only available when the VGA monitor is in sequence mode. Allows you to display the Sequence screen and add (or remove) resources to (or from) the monitor sequence. Also allows you to adjust the display time of each resource within the VGA monitor’s sequence. Allows you to choose to play back video footage from one of the three sectors: Prime, Time lapse, and Alarm. Not available when a map is displayed on the VGA monitor. Allows you to turn the audio transmission on and off for the audio channel associated with the camera currently displayed on the VGA monitor.

Sequence

Sector

Audio

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-203

SiteManager
Monitor mode

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual A dynamic indicator showing the current monitor mode: live, playback, paused, etc.

Monitor Panel Playback Commands
Table 3-12: Monitor Panel Toolbar Buttons and Features
Function Description Allows you to go to the beginning of the camera's video footage and audio archive on the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Allows you to quickly rewind video footage and audio for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Also allows you to rewind the video footage and audio frame-by-frame when used with the Pause button. Allows you to stop video footage and audio playback for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Allows you to commence video footage and audio playback on the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Allows you to pause the video footage and audio playback for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Also allows you to forward or rewind the video footage and audio frame-by-frame when used with the FFW and REW buttons. Allows you to quickly forward video footage and audio for the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Also allows you to forward the video footage and audio frame-by-frame when used with the Pause button. Allows you to go to the end of the camera’s video footage and audio archive on the currently selected monitor or monitor group. Opens the Find window, allowing you to find a particular video clip by selecting the date and time.

The Sequence Screen
VGA monitors can be configured with sequences, meaning that the monitors can be configured with a combination of cameras, maps, and/or views. The Sequence screen is displayed on the virtual video desktop and allows you to adjust the display time of each resource included in the sequence. The Sequence screen can be categorized into the Monitor scroll button and the Resource box (consisting of a Display unit and a Time field).

NOTE
Sequences cannot be used with network (DVN 100-NET) monitors.

3-204

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

Display unit Resource box Monitor scroll button

Time field

For information on the sequence screen, see “Adding Resources to a VGA Monitor” on page 3-208.

Buttons and Features (Sequence Screen)
The following information covers each feature on the Sequence screen.
Monitor scroll button

Allows you to create a monitor sequence that will be displayed on the selected VGA monitor. The arrows allow you to scroll left or right and access more resource boxes. Consists of a Display unit and a Time field. The Display unit provides you with information about which camera, map, or view has been added to the monitor sequence. The Time field allows you to select the resource’s display time.

Resource box

Adding Network Monitors
VGA monitors are automatically detected by SiteManager and therefore cannot be added or removed from the configuration. By contrast, in order to display cameras on a network monitor, you must first create it within the SiteManager configuration. The procedure only requires you to know the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connected. Note the following:

Verify that the SiteManager client and the DVN 100-NET decoders are connected to the same network. You may display any camera managed by SiteManager on a network monitor. The number of network monitors you can add is determined by the number of DVN 100-NET decoders present on the network. To add a network monitor, you must be granted the right to create resources upon your user account configuration.

 

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-205

SiteManager  To add a network monitor: 1. Click the Monitors tab.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

All the existing monitors appear in the hierarchy window.

2. Right-click on the hierarchy window, or click Monitor in the menu bar, and select New monitor.

3. In the Name field, enter the preferred network monitor name. 4. In the Address field, enter the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connected. 5. Verify that DVN 100 server is displayed in the Type drop-down list. 6. Click OK. The network monitor will be added to the Monitors hierarchy window.

Editing Monitors
Editing a monitor allows you to change the monitor’s name, IP address (network monitors only), and enable and select the monitor mode (VGA monitors only).

NOTE
To edit a monitor, you must be granted the right to edit resources upon your user account configuration.

 To edit a monitor: 1. Select the Monitors tab.

3-206

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual All the available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.

SiteManager

2. Right-click on the VGA or network Monitor icon and select Edit monitor, or select the VGA or network monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Edit monitor from the menu bar. If you selected a VGA monitor, the VGA monitor dialog box appears.

If you selected a network monitor, the network monitor dialog box appears.

3. (VGA monitor only) Verify that the Enabled check box is selected. 4. In the Name field, enter the preferred monitor name. 5. (VGA monitor only) To enable the sequence resource mode (i.e. to be able to create camera, view, and map sequences on the VGA monitor), select the Sequence check box. To enable the single resource mode (i.e. to use the VGA monitor for displaying a single camera, view, or map), deselect the Sequence check box.

NOTE
If a VGA monitor has been configured in the sequence resource mode and the single resource mode is then enabled, any resources that were part of the VGA monitor’s sequence will be removed from the VGA monitor’s hierarchy.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-207

SiteManager

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

6. (Network monitor only) In the Address field, edit the IP address, as needed, by entering the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connect. 7. Click OK.

NOTE
You may also edit a monitor’s name by double-clicking on the Monitor icon in the hierarchy window and entering the preferred name. When double-clicking on the Monitor icon, the second click needs to be slightly delayed.

Adding Resources to a VGA Monitor
SiteManager supports a single VGA monitor. The VGA monitor can be set to a single resource mode or a sequence resource mode and can display cameras, 2D maps, and views. When the VGA monitor is in single resource mode, only one camera, map, or view can be displayed. When a VGA monitor is in sequence resource mode, multiple cameras, maps, and views can be displayed automatically one after the other, each with a unique display time. In this mode, resources cannot be displayed on the VGA monitor by using the Send to monitor option.

NOTE
To add resources to a VGA monitor, you must be granted the right to create resources upon your user account configuration.

Cameras Displayed on VGA Monitors
All cameras included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client, regardless of the server to which the camera is connected.

Camera Domes Displayed and Controlled on VGA Monitors
All camera domes included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed and controlled on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client, regardless of the server to which the camera dome is connected.

Maps Displayed on VGA Monitors
All 2D maps included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client.

3-208

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

or select the VGA monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Show resource from the menu bar. or view resource. Select the Monitors tab. The Resource window appears.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Views Displayed on VGA Monitors All views included in a SiteManager configuration can be displayed on a VGA monitor connected to the SiteManager client. 3. All the available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. only cameras connected to a DVN 5000 server can be played back as part of a view displayed on the SiteManager client’s VGA monitor. Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Single Resource Mode)  To add a VGA monitor resource (single resource mode): 1. Inc. From the menu bar. However. Groups. or Views tab to access the required camera. Inc. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 2D map. 3-209 . Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. Monitor resource method Right-click on the VGA Monitor icon and select Show resource. or view resource from the hierarchy window to the required VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Maps. 2. 24-10248-56 Rev. Click and drag the camera. 2D map. Use one of the following methods to add a resource: Drag and drop method Select the Servers. select Window.

All the available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. select Window. Right-click on the VGA monitor icon and select Edit monitor. . Verify that the Sequence check box is selected. If you added a camera or view. Adding VGA Monitor Resources (Sequence Resource Mode)  To add a VGA monitor resource (sequence resource mode): 1. Select the Monitors tab. then the following will be displayed in the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel: 4. Inc. since you cannot access the camera until the server has been connected. 3-210 24-10248-56 Rev. Server (cameras only). map or view). and Resource. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3. A resource does not have to be connected to add it to a VGA monitor unless you are adding a camera from the Servers tab. Click OK.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Select the resource Type (camera. From the menu bar. The resource will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the VGA monitor. The resource will be added to the VGA monitor hierarchy and the resource’s details will be displayed in the corresponding VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel. Inc. then the following will be displayed in the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel: If you added a map. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. See “Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors” on page 3-216 for detailed information. 2.

The Resource window appears. 5. The resource will be added to the VGA monitor sequence hierarchy and the resource’s name will be shown in the display unit. 3-211 . © 2011 Johnson Controls. 24-10248-56 Rev.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 4. Click and drag the resource from the hierarchy window to the required display unit on the Sequence screen or to the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel. map or view). 2D map. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Enter the resource’s display time in the Time field. Click OK. Inc. Select the resource Type (camera. and Resource. Groups. Inc. or view resource. Server (cameras only). Monitor resource method Right-click on the VGA Monitor icon and select Add resource to sequence. The display time ranges from 0 to 100 seconds. Click the Sequence button on the VGA monitor section on the Monitor panel. The Sequence screen appears. or select the VGA monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Show resource from the menu bar. Maps. Use one of the following methods to add a resource: Drag and drop method Select the Servers. or Views tab to access the required camera.

All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. map or view) will be shown. only one resource (camera. since you cannot access the camera until the server has been connected. NOTE To remove a resource from a VGA monitor.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The resource will not be displayed on the VGA monitor until you unblank the VGA monitor. See “Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors” on page 3-216 for detailed information. Double-click on the VGA monitor icon in the hierarchy window. Select the Monitors tab. 2. The display time ranges from 0 to 100 seconds. specify the resource’s display time in the Time field. Inc. 7. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. . If the VGA monitor is in the single resource mode.  To delete a VGA monitor resource: 1. Removing VGA Monitor Resources VGA monitor resources can be removed by using the VGA monitor menu or simply clicking and dragging. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have added all the resources you wish to include in the VGA monitor sequence. The VGA monitor resource hierarchy will be displayed. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-212 24-10248-56 Rev. If you used the drag and drop method. A resource does not have to be connected to add it to a VGA monitor unless you are adding a camera from the Servers tab. you must be granted the right to delete resources upon your user account configuration. 6.

   24-10248-56 Rev. Note the following:  Before starting. release the left mouse button. or you can add a camera resource to the network monitor.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 3. verify that the SiteManager client and the DVN 100-NET decoders are connected to the same network. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. simply click and drag the required camera from a hierarchy to the required network monitor section on the Monitor panel. however. Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. The number of network monitors is determined by the number of DVN 100-NET decoders present on the network. Once the mouse cursor is outside of the Sequence screen. The Sequence screen appears. © 2011 Johnson Controls. You may add a camera from any of the servers managed by SiteManager. Inc. OR on the VGA monitor section on the Monitor Click the Sequence button panel. The selected resource will be removed from the selected VGA monitor. See “Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227. Click on the required display area and drag it out of the Sequence screen. or right-click on the resource you wish to delete and select Remove from sequence. you can use the Quad View feature to display up to four cameras on a single spot monitor. Inc. Select the resource which you wish to delete and select Resource>Delete resource from the menu bar. 3-213 . Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor To add a camera to a network monitor. You cannot create a camera sequence for a network monitor. 4.

3.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual To add a camera to a network monitor. Select the Monitors tab. see “Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227 for more information. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click and drag the camera resource from the hierarchy window to the required network monitor section on the Monitor panel. the camera may be displayed on one or two monitor types. Depending on the server to which a dome camera is connected. Inc. the dome camera may be displayed and controlled on one or two monitor types. Groups. Inc. you must be granted the right to create resources upon your user account configuration. Adding a Camera to a Network Monitor (Procedure)  To add a camera to a network monitor: 1. Use one of the following methods to add a camera resource: Drag and drop method Select the Servers. or Views tab to access camera resources. If using the Quad View feature. From the menu bar. 3-214 24-10248-56 Rev. select Window. Camera Domes Displayed and Controlled on Network Monitors PTZ control of camera domes is available for most camera domes displayed on SiteManager network monitors.  Cameras Displayed on Network Monitors Any camera defined in SiteManager can be displayed on an analog monitor connected to the SiteManager client via a connection to a DVN 100-NET decoder (network monitor). 2. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. . Depending on the server to which a camera is connected. You will need to display all the cameras used under any one of the tabs by clicking on the Plus sign (+) in front of the resource type on the hierarchy window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. Maps. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

The camera will be added to the network monitor. © 2011 Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Monitor resource method SiteManager Right-click on the Network Monitor icon and select Show camera. Select the camera Server and Resource and click OK. map. It is not necessary for a camera resource to be connected to add it to a network monitor unless you are adding it from the Servers tab. and the camera and server names will be displayed in the corresponding network monitor section on the Monitor panel. Inc. The Resource window appears. For additional information. or a view hierarchy. 3-215 . Inc. see: • • • • • “Working with Server Resources” on page 3-46 “Working with Group Resources” on page 3-134 “Working with Map Resources” on page 3-160 “Working with View Resources” on page 3-181 “Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227 24-10248-56 Rev. or select the network monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Show camera from the menu bar. If a camera is sent to a network monitor from a server. it will simply replace the camera currently displayed on the selected network monitor. Adding a camera results in an automatic connection of the network monitor (DVN 100-NET decoder) to the appropriate server. 4. group. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. since you cannot access the camera resource until the server has been connected. live video footage will be displayed on the network monitor.

3-216 24-10248-56 Rev.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Removing a Camera from a Network Monitor Removing a camera from a network monitor can be achieved by using the Network monitor menu. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Select the Monitors tab. Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors This section describes how to display cameras. Inc. you must be granted the right to use resources based upon your user account configuration. Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. Before starting. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. verify that the VGA monitor has been configured with at least one resource before performing the procedure in this section. Select the camera you wish to delete and select Resource>Delete resource from the menu bar. the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden until you close or blank the VGA resource display. or click the Plus sign (+) in front of the Network Monitor icon whose camera you wish to access. Double-click on the Network Monitor icon whose camera you wish to access. to display resources on a VGA monitor. 2. . you must be granted the right to delete resources upon your user account configuration. Also. and views on a VGA monitor. NOTE When resources are displayed on the VGA monitor. 3. The selected network monitor’s camera hierarchy appears. NOTE To remove a camera from a network monitor. 4.  To delete a camera from a network monitor: 1. or right-click on the camera you wish to delete and select Remove from sequence. Inc. The selected camera will be removed from the selected network monitor. maps.

© 2011 Johnson Controls. Click the Connect/Disconnect toggle button . 2. the user has complete access to monitor display and playback without the need to connect the servers first. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. the rest of the monitors will remain fully functional. perform one of the following actions in accordance with the type of resource you are viewing: • • Camera or View: Right-click on the VGA screen and select Close/Blank. Map: Click on the map toolbar. Inc. in Connecting to Network Monitors Network monitors must be connected to view or play back video footage and audio.  To connect a network monitor: 1. If the VGA monitor is in the single sequence mode. 3. From the menu bar. 3. the VGA monitor sequence will commence on the VGA screen and the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden. If you are using the Quad View feature. When you no longer wish to display the resource or the resource sequence on the VGA monitor. select Window. 4. if one monitor experiences problems. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. As each monitor has its own connection. see “Connecting or Disconnecting Regions” on page 233. you must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration. or right-click on the VGA monitor icon in the hierarchy window and deselect Blank. In addition. 24-10248-56 Rev. From the menu bar. NOTE To connect a network monitor. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If the VGA monitor is in the sequence resource mode. select Window. 3-217 . Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. Select the Monitors tab. the single resource will be displayed on the VGA screen and the SiteManager Main screen will be hidden. click the Unblank icon a VGA monitor section of the Monitor panel. Inc. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. To display the resource(s) on the VGA monitor.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To display resources on a VGA monitor: 1. SiteManager 2. Select the Monitors tab.

Playback commands function in the same manner as they do for video footage playback in camera video and view screens. click the Connect/Disconnect toggle button in the Monitor panel. it may not be able to be played back at all. The DVN 100-NET decoder to which the network monitor is connected when video footage is played back on a network monitor. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. as well as for live viewing. speakers must be appropriately connected to the following:  The SiteManager client when video footage is played back on a VGA monitor. To transmit lip-synchronized audio with the recorded video footage. Cameras Played Back on SiteManager Monitors Video footage and audio can be played back from cameras available in the SiteManager configuration. Inc. see “Connecting or Disconnecting Regions” on page 233. 3-218 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. standard playback commands can be used to review the video footage. Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors VGA and network monitors can be used to play back recorded video footage and audio. If you are using the Quad View feature. For information on Quad View mode.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Disconnecting a Monitor To disconnect a monitor. See Table 3-13 for detailed information about which cameras can be played back on SiteManager monitors. See also “Toggling Between Single and Quad View Modes” on page 232. . you must configure it for Single View mode. see “Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature” on page 227. Once the camera is displayed on the VGA or network (DVN 100-NET) monitor.  See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands. To play back video and audio on a network monitor. NOTE Depending on the server to which a camera is connected. Alternatively. the camera may be played back on one or both monitor types. NOTE Video and audio playback is not supported on DVN 100-NET network monitors in Quad View mode. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The selected monitor will be disconnected.

Select the Monitors tab. Inc. 8. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Use the playback commands. select Window. click on the monitor section of the monitor on which you wish to play back video footage and audio. 2. see “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122. see “Saving a Still Image” on page 3-121. you will need to wait until the required camera is displayed in the sequence before commencing the playback. Select a sector from the Sector drop-down list. 5. click . 6. To save a video clip. so that the required monitor section is highlighted. Inc. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode. as needed. 3-219 . use the Audio toggle button on the VGA monitor. 4. 4. 3. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. See “Connecting to Network Monitors” on page 3-217.  To play back video footage and audio on a network monitor: 1. To save a still image. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback. Display the camera resource of a VGA monitor. From the menu bar.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Table 3-13: Monitor and Server Compatibility Server Type DVN 5000 DVN 3000 Yes Yes Monitor Type VGA Network Yes Yes No SiteManager DVN 100-NET Decoder No  To play back video footage and audio from a single camera on a VGA monitor: 1. In the Monitor panel. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. See “Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors” on page 3-216. 7. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. To play back footage from a different camera that is part of the VGA monitor sequence. From the menu bar. 2. select Window. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for assistance. 3. Select the Monitors tab. 24-10248-56 Rev. Connect to the desired network monitor.

Use the playback commands. 9. assuming the speakers are connected correctly to the DVN 100-NET decoder. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for assistance. 7. Inc. See “Toggling Between Single and Quad View Modes” on page 232. Inc. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback. as needed. See “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on Monitors” on page 3-221 for detailed information about the find functions. 3-220 24-10248-56 Rev. allowing you to play back multiple cameras from multiple DVN 5000 servers simultaneously. . 10. Audio will be played back automatically where it has been recorded along with video footage. 8. If a camera is connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder or a DVN 3000 server. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback on VGA Monitors Views can be displayed on VGA monitors. Click the Play playback button .SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 5. Select a sector from the Sector drop-down list. 6. Verify that the monitor is in Single View mode. © 2011 Johnson Controls. the playback commands and the Find function will be disabled. The camera’s video footage will begin to play back from the selected sector. use the Audio toggle button on the VGA monitor. You may use the find functions to select the video footage to be played back.

Follow the instructions starting on step 2 (page 3-185) in “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” for assistance. and repeat 8. 4. Finding a Still Image or Video Clip on Monitors You may use the Find (for both monitor types) or Visual search (for VGA monitors only) buttons to locate required images or video footage. you will need to wait until the view whose cameras you wish to play back is displayed before selecting the master. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. To repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master. click steps 3 through 5. are disabled when a camera connected to a DVN 100-NET encoder is displayed individually (on any monitor type) or as a master of a view (on VGA monitors only). these functions allow you to quickly access the recorded footage. and 6. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. 2. Select the sector and use the playback commands. select Window. 1. 7. To save multiple video clips simultaneously. NOTE The Find and Visual search buttons. 3-221 . Display the view resource of a VGA monitor. as well as the playback commands. Inc. use the Audio toggle button on the VGA monitor.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager  To simultaneously play back video footage and audio from multiple cameras on a VGA monitor: NOTE Please verify that the view whose cameras you wish to play back is part of the VGA monitor hierarchy. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. since DVN 100-NET encoders only transmit live video footage and audio. click repeat steps 4 and 5. see “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190 for detailed information. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Select the Monitors tab. To repeat the procedure using a different camera or view. 3. as needed. See “Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors” on page 3-216. 5. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode. 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. If you know the date and time of the image or video clip you require. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback. From the menu bar.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. After clicking OK on the Find dialog box. video footage recorded at the selected date and time will be displayed on the selected monitor. 2. 24-10248-56 Rev. Select the Monitors tab. assuming the speakers are connected correctly to the DVN 100-NET decoder. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If you do not know the date and time. Connect to the desired monitor. use the playback commands to view all of the footage. 4. © 2011 Johnson Controls. From the menu bar. 9. See “Connecting to Network Monitors” on page 3-217 for details. 3. 8. Follow the instructions starting on step 4 (page 3-117) in “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” for assistance. In the Monitor panel. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. To play back footage from a different camera that is part of the monitor . as needed. . 6. Use the Sector drop-down list and the Find button to locate the desired still image or video clip. The camera’s video footage will begin to play back from the selected sector. Use the playback commands. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for assistance. click 3-222 on the monitor. 5. See “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio on Monitors” on page 3-218 for detailed information about playback commands. click on the monitor section of the monitor whose video footage and audio you wish to search. Inc.  To find a still image or video clip using the Find button on network monitors: 1. paused and ready for playback. 10. Audio will be played back automatically where it has been recorded along with video footage. Inc. so that the required monitor section is highlighted. Click the Play playback button . 7. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. select Window. use the Audio toggle button sequence.

the first resource in the VGA monitor’s sequence will be displayed first. see “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190. video footage recorded at the selected date and time will be displayed on the selected VGA monitor for the master camera as well as all other cameras included in the view. Use the playback commands. If you are searching on a camera. After clicking OK on the Find dialog box: • If you are searching on a camera. Select the Monitors tab. 6. If you are searching on a view. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager  To find a still image or video clip using the Find button on VGA monitors: 1. 9. 8. wait until the required camera or view is displayed before proceeding with the next step. 3-223 . If a map is the first resource in the sequence. see “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122. To repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback. continue with step 5. To save multiple video clips simultaneously. 11. See “Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors” on page 216. select Window. and and repeat 24-10248-56 Rev. click on the camera you wish to be the master of the search. From the menu bar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If you are searching on a view. The selected camera will display a red outline. Continue with step 5. If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode. 10. click repeat steps 4 through 9. Use the Sector drop-down list and the Find button to locate the desired still image or video clip. video footage recorded at the selected date and time will be displayed on the selected VGA monitor. 2. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Display the camera(s) and/or view(s) on the VGA monitor. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. paused and ready for playback. To save a video clip. 3. To save a still image. use the Audio toggle button on the monitor. See “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a view and “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a camera. • 7. 5. Inc. Inc. Follow the instructions starting on step 4 (page 3-117) in “Finding a Still Image or Video Clip” for assistance. 4. see “Saving a Still Image” on page 3-121. To repeat the procedure using a different camera or view. as needed. click steps 3 through 9.

5. If a map is the first resource in the sequence. Click the Visual search button . If the VGA monitor is in sequence mode. . select the desired camera sector. Display the camera(s) and/or view(s) on the VGA monitor. 3. The camera sector will be changed. If you are searching a camera and the Alarm sector. Select the Monitors tab. 6. the first resource in the VGA monitor’s sequence will be displayed first. allowing you to find the required still image and/or video footage. In the Sectors drop-down list. If you are searching a camera and the Prime sector. See “Displaying Resources on VGA Monitors” on page 216. If you are searching a view and the Prime sector. Continue with step 5. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2. 4. as selected. wait until the required camera or view is displayed before proceeding with the next step. The selected camera will display a red outline. From the menu bar. then the camera visual search panel appears. then the camera visual search panel appears. then the camera visual search panel appears. Inc. 3-224 24-10248-56 Rev. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. Inc. select Window. If you are searching on a camera.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To find a still image or video clip using the Visual search button on VGA monitors: 1. If you are searching a camera and the Time lapse sector. continue with step 5. then the view visual search panel appears. If you are searching on a view. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. click on the camera you wish to be the master of the search.

If you are searching on a view. The date and time in the upper right-hand corner indicate the end of the available recorded video footage. When searching cameras or views: • • • • The blue index represents the recorded video footage. 9. The number of rows depends on the number of cameras included in the view screen. The names on the left-hand side of the index indicate to which camera each index row belongs. video footage will be played back on the selected VGA monitor for the master camera as well as all other • 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. If you are searching a view and the Alarm sector. If you are searching on a camera. video footage will be played back on the selected VGA monitor starting from the time indicated by the index pointer.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager If you are searching a view and the Time lapse sector. Use the Plus (+) and Minus (-) buttons to adjust the increments on the Time scale. 8. 3-225 . then the view visual search panel appears. Click the Play playback button • . When searching views only: • • 7. The pointer determines the start of the video clip that will be played back. or click and drag the pointer to the required time on the index. Inc. then the view visual search find panel appears. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Use the horizontal scroll bar to locate the correct date and/or time. The date and time in the middle indicate the date and time of the video footage as currently selected by the pointer. The date and time in the upper left-hand corner indicate the beginning of the available recorded video footage. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

Inc. starting from the time indicated by the index pointer. During the playback. Select the Monitors tab. 13. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. See “Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback” on page 3-184 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a view and “Playing Back Video Footage and Audio” on page 3-114 for detailed information about using the playback commands on a camera. To control transmission of recorded audio during the playback. 2. Use the playback commands. as needed. 3-226 24-10248-56 Rev. . click repeat steps 4 through 12. click steps 3 through 12. NOTE VGA monitors cannot be deleted from the SiteManager configuration. 14. you must be granted the right to delete resources upon your user account configuration. 3. see “Saving a Still Image” on page 3-121. see “Saving a Video Clip” on page 3-122. Click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box. To repeat the procedure using a different camera as the master. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window. To save a still image. and and repeat Deleting Network Monitors This section describes how to remove a network monitor from the SiteManager configuration. or select the network monitor in the hierarchy window and select Monitor>Delete monitor from the menu bar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 11.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual cameras included in the view. 10. To save a video clip. Right-click on the Network Monitor icon and select Delete monitor. To save multiple video clips simultaneously. see “Saving Video Clips” on page 3-190. you may use the scroll bar or the index pointer to move through the recorded footage with greater speed and ease.  To delete a network monitor: 1. Also. use the Audio toggle button on the monitor. to delete a network monitor. To repeat the procedure using a different camera or view. 12. The selected network monitor will be removed from the SiteManager configuration.

See Figure 3-1. 3-227 . Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. or other DVN 100-NET server (in encoder mode) on a single spot monitor. DVN 3000-NET. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. camera views).VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Using the DVN 100-NET Quad View Spot Monitor Feature SiteManager supports the DVN 100-NET Quad View feature. which enables any DVN 100-NET in decoder mode to display up to four MPEG4 cameras from a DVN 5000. Inc. which blacks out the quadrant associated with a disconnected region   A spot monitor configured for quad view mode displays four equal quadrants. Figure 3-1: Quad View Architecture with DVN 100-NET Decoder 24-10248-56 Rev. with each quadrant displaying a particular camera view. Using SiteManager. you can:  Configure which cameras can be viewed on the spot monitor connected to the  DVN 100-NET decoder Toggle the monitor display between single or quad view Disconnect one or more regions (that is.

3-228 24-10248-56 Rev. on screen display text. The Playback icon is disabled when the monitor is in quad view mode. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. When using the quad view feature. Inc. or a DVN 100-NET in encoder mode. you may use 4CIF at a higher FPS. . However. You can also use other video sources. The Quad View feature does not support playback of recorded video footage. these features are supported in single view mode. The Quad View feature does not support audio. as shown in Figure 3-1. select the Monitors tab. If you add a video source that uses Wavelet or Enpacta compression to a quad view quadrant. and camera cycling on a spot monitor. When viewing a single video stream.      To configure the DVN 100-NET Quad View feature: 1. such as cameras connected to a DVN 3000-NET. the spot monitor will display only a black background.SiteManager Note the following:  VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Video sources are not limited to cameras connected to a DVN 5000. Camera video compressed with Wavelet or Enpacta codecs are not supported in quad view mode – only video compressed with the MPEG4 codec can be viewed in this mode. we strongly recommend limiting each camera to CIF resolution at 30 Frames Per Second (FPS) (or 4CIF resolution at a maximum of 10 FPS). © 2011 Johnson Controls. On the left window pane. Increasing the resolution and/or FPS will overload the DVN 100-NET CPU. Inc. which will delay the time it takes to display the video.

3. 24-10248-56 Rev. enter the IP address of the DVN 100-NET decoder to which the monitor is connected. Click OK. click inside the monitor icon. 3-229 . The Monitor dialog box appears. to change the monitor from single to quad view. 4. 5. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 7. Verify that DVN 100 server is displayed in the Type drop-down list. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. skip to step 7 for quad-view configuration instructions. In the Name field. The new monitor appears in the Monitors hierarchy window. enter the preferred network monitor name (for example.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager NOTE The next few steps describe how to add a network monitor for a DVN 100-NET decoder. 2. 6. “DVN 100-NET Decoder”). If the monitor has already been added. Inc. Right-click on the hierarchy window or click Monitor in the menu bar and select New Monitor. In the Address field. On the monitor panel.

Assign a camera to each quadrant. select the Servers tab. Expand the Cameras item. 3-230 24-10248-56 Rev. In the hierarchy tree. 8. expand the server whose camera(s) you wish to assign to the monitor. Inc. drag and drop the camera from the list to the desired quadrant on the monitor icon. . 11. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. indicating the quadrant number (1-4). 9. To start. a number appears. Inc. To assign a camera to one of the monitor’s quadrants. 10.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The monitor icon displays four quadrants or regions. When hovering over a particular quadrant. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The quadrants are numbered as follows:

SiteManager

1 3

2 4

When you successfully assign a camera to a quadrant, a red dot appears inside the quadrant to indicate a camera assignment.

To view information about the camera assigned to the quadrant, hover your mouse cursor over the quadrant (there is no need to click a mouse button). The camera name and associated server appear in a pop-up message. 12. Repeat step 11 until all four quadrants have a camera assigned.

NOTE
The Quad View feature can also be configured using the DVN 100-NET user interface; therefore, SiteManager and the DVN 100-NET may initially be out of sync when you configure the Quad View feature from SiteManager. For example, you configure SiteManager to display Cameras A, B, C, and D, but the DVN 100-NET is configured to display Cameras W, X, Y, and Z. For this reason, we recommend that you synchronize SiteManager and the DVN 100-NET by using SiteManager to disconnect and then reconnect all regions (see “Connecting or Disconnecting Regions” on page 3-233). When you synchronize in this manner, the SiteManager configuration takes precedence over the DVN 100-NET configuration.

NOTE
Configuring the Quad View feature from more than one SiteManager client may also cause them to become out of sync. To resolve any synchronization problems, use SiteManager to disconnect and then reconnect all regions. The quad view configuration on the SiteManager client where the regions are disconnected and then reconnected take precedence over configurations on other clients.

Other Quad View Configuration Options
This section covers the following quad view configuration options:
  

Reassigning cameras to quadrants Unassigning a camera from a quadrant Toggling between single and quad view modes

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-231

SiteManager

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Connecting or disconnecting regions

Reassigning Cameras to Quadrants
To assign a different camera to a particular quadrant or rearrange cameras on the quad view, drag and drop cameras from the Server tab to the desired quadrant on the monitor icon until you have the desired configuration.

Unassigning a Camera from a Quadrant
 To unassign a camera from a quadrant: 1. Select the Monitors tab. 2. In the hierarchy tree, expand the DVN 100-NET monitor whose camera(s) you wish to unassign.

3. Right-click on the camera you wish to unassign and select Remove from sequence. The red dot in the quadrant where that camera was assigned will be removed. When you unassign a camera from a quadrant, the monitor will display only a black background on the associated quadrant.

Toggling Between Single and Quad View Modes
This feature enables you to toggle between single and quad view modes, if needed.

To toggle to single view mode, click the quadrant representing the camera you wish to view in single view mode. For example, if you click quadrant number 2, the camera assigned to that quadrant will be used in single view mode. To toggle back to quad view mode, simply click the monitor icon again. Unless a camera has been manually removed from the sequence on the Monitors tab, all four cameras previously configured for quad view mode will be retained in their previous quadrant assignments.

3-232

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

Connecting or Disconnecting Regions
In addition to the toggle feature, you can disconnect a particular region (that is, quadrant). When a region is disconnected, the monitor displays only a black background for that particular quadrant.

NOTE
The camera assigned to a disconnected region remains assigned to its quadrant until it is unassigned. See “Unassigning a Camera from a Quadrant” on page 232.

To disconnect a single region, click the Region icon’s drop-down arrow and select the region you wish to disconnect. The region’s icon changes according to the connection status.
Connected Regions Disconnected Region

To connect or disconnect all regions (depending on their current status), click the Region icon next to its drop-down arrow.

Monitor Groups
Monitor groups enable you to group VGA and network monitors in order to manage them with greater ease and efficiency.

NOTE
You must be granted the right to create, use, edit, and delete resources upon your user account configuration to access all the functions listed in this section.

Monitor Group Menu Options
To manage monitor groups, you may select the functions described in this section. To select a function, right-click on the Monitor group icon in the hierarchy window.
New monitor group Delete monitor group Edit monitor group

Opens the Monitor group window, allowing you to create a monitor group. Allows you to delete a monitor group. Opens the Monitor group window, allowing you to change the monitor group name.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-233

SiteManager
Show/Hide

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual A toggle button that allows you to display (or remove) monitor group screens on (or from) the virtual video desktop. Connects to all the cameras’ servers, allowing you to view the video footage of the monitor group. Disconnects from all the cameras’ servers included in the monitor group. Opens the Resource window and allows you to add monitors to the monitor group.

Connect

Disconnect

Add resource

Creating a Monitor Group
Before creating a monitor group, you must configure all individual monitors and add them as resources.

Note
In order to create a monitor group, at least two monitors must be part of the SiteManager configuration. The number and combination of monitor groups that you may create is only limited by the number of monitors available in the SiteManager configuration.

NOTE
To add a network monitor to a monitor group, you must be granted the right to create resources based upon your user account configuration.

 To create a monitor group: 1. Click the Monitors tab. All available monitors appear in the hierarchy window.

2. From the menu bar, select Window. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. 3. Right-click on the hierarchy window or click Monitor in the drop-down toolbar. The Monitor menu appears.

3-234

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual

SiteManager

4. Select New monitor group. The Monitor group window appears.

5. Enter the preferred monitor group name and click OK. The new monitor group appears in the hierarchy window.

6. On the Monitors panel, use the Monitors drop-down list to select the monitor group you wish to be displayed on the Monitors panel. Since you have not yet added a monitor to the monitor group, the Monitors panel should be empty. 7. Right-click on the newly added monitor group in the hierarchy window. The Monitor Group menu appears.

The Show option will remain disabled until you add monitors to the monitor group. 8. Select Add resource. The Resource window appears.

The Server drop-down list is disabled. 9. Using the bottom drop-down list, select the monitor you wish to add to the group and click OK.

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3-235

SiteManager

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The selected monitor will be added to the monitor group.

10. Repeat steps 8-9 for each monitor you wish to include in the monitor group. 11. Repeat steps 4-9 for each monitor group you wish to create.

Connecting a Monitor Group
A monitor group must be connected for the playback commands to become functional. The easiest way is to connect all the monitors within a monitor group at once; however, if required, you also have the option of connecting each monitor in the group individually, since monitor connections are independent. To connect a monitor group, you must be granted the right to use resources upon your user account configuration.  To simultaneously connect all monitors in a monitor group: 1. Click the Monitors tab. All available monitors and monitor groups appear in the hierarchy window.

3-236

24-10248-56 Rev. B
This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls, Inc.

3. requiring the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. select Window. Inc. If the cameras included in the selected monitor group are from a server that requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server. Click the Monitors tab. 2. a Server Connection window will appear for each server. NOTE If a monitor group contains cameras from multiple servers. Verify that Show monitors panel is selected. NOTE See “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20 for detailed information about user name and password settings. Enter your DVN server user name and password. © 2011 Johnson Controls.  To connect each monitor individually using the Monitor Group panel: 1. The selected monitor group will be connected to the cameras’ servers.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 2. Select Connect. Inc. 4. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. All available monitors and monitor groups appear in the hierarchy window. Right-click on the monitor group to which you wish to connect. the Server Connection window appears. 3-237 . 24-10248-56 Rev. and each monitor included in the group will display its cameras or resources. From the menu bar. The Monitor Group menu appears.

the Server Connection window appears. select the monitor group you wish to display on the Monitors panel. Inc. . From the Monitors drop-down list. NOTE If a monitor group contains cameras from multiple servers. The selected monitor will be connected to the server and the monitor’s camera sequence will commence. If the cameras included in the selected monitor sequence are from a server which requires the user to enter his/her user name and password to connect to the server. Enter your DVN server user name and password. 3-238 24-10248-56 Rev. for each monitor in the 5. a Server Connection window will appear for each server. Click the Connect/Disconnect toggle button Monitors panel. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. NOTE See “Creating or Importing a New Server” on page 3-20 for detailed information about user name and password settings. 4.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 3. © 2011 Johnson Controls. requiring the user to enter his/her user name and password to establish a connection. Inc.

3-239 . You may jump between tabs and hierarchies without disturbing any of the screens displayed on the desktop. It includes information about the following:            Virtual Video Desktop (see page 3-239) Recording User’s Desktop Activity (see page 3-244) Limiting Login Attempts (see page 3-245) Configuring the System Log (see page 3-246) Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel (see page 3-249) Configuring Regular Server Status Checks (see page 3-253) Searching the Hierarchies (see page 3-256) Configuring Proprietary Keyboard Settings (see page 3-257) Pelco® 9760 Keyboard Integration (see page 3-257) Managing the SiteManager Configuration (see page 3-264) VisionWeb ActiveX Manager (see page 3-266) Virtual Video Desktop All camera video. You may custom arrange your desktop by clicking and dragging individual screens to the desired positions or use the desktop tools and let SiteManager organize the desktop for you. Inc. See the following diagram. It allows you to simultaneously view as few or as many screens as you require. 24-10248-56 Rev. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. allowing you to scroll up and down through as many different camera video. The virtual video desktop functions are located on the Main screen’s toolbar and under Windows in the menu bar. Inc. and view screens as required. map. The desktop size is infinite. A scroll bar is automatically added so that all the selected screens may be displayed simultaneously. The virtual video desktop is independent of the hierarchy window and tabs.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager MAINTENANCE This section describes a variety of procedures that allow you to successfully maintain the SiteManager client function and configuration. © 2011 Johnson Controls. and view screens are displayed on the virtual video desktop. map.

e. the following functions are available by selecting Window from the menu bar or clicking the buttons in the toolbar. and 4x selection.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual New server/group/ map/3D map/view/ monitor Add aux Cascade 2x Bring map(s) to front Bring server(s) to front Add camera Add alarm Tile 1x 4x Bring camera(s) to front Bring view(s) to front Buttons and Features (Virtual Video Desktop) To maintain the virtual video desktop. Cascade 1x 2x 3-240 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2x. Arranges currently displayed camera video screens on top of one another (i. Displays two camera video screens in each row. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Tile Arranges currently displayed camera video screens in rows and columns. Displays one camera video screen in each row. The number of camera video screens in each row is determined by the 1x. The following information includes a brief description of each feature. Inc. Inc. . in a cascade arrangement).

maps. Displays camera(s) as the top layer on the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when maps. or server interface screen is shown. view.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 4x Bring cameras to front SiteManager Displays four camera video screens in each row. monitors. view. Allows you to display or hide the monitor panel. monitors. when any camera video. when any camera video. as they only apply to SiteManager resources. and/or server interfaces are also present. map. it will be displayed in the top left-hand corner of the virtual video desktop. If enabled. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. or server interface screen is closed. Show status bar NOTE See the definitions under “Toolbar” on page 3-8 for information about the New server/group/view/map/3D map/monitor toggle button and the Add camera. views. the next time it is shown. If disabled. maps. and/or server interfaces are also present. Allows you to display or hide the status bar. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. and/or monitors are also present. views. Displays server interface(s) at the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras. Displays view(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras. Bring maps to front Bring views to front Bring server interfaces to front Options in the Windows Menu Show log window Show monitors panel Remember window positions Allows you to display or hide the log window. 24-10248-56 Rev. views. 3-241 . it will be displayed on the virtual video desktop in the same position as it was the last time it was closed. Displays map(s) as the top layer in the virtual video desktop for clear viewing when cameras. monitors. These buttons are not listed in the definitions above. and/or server interfaces are also present. and Add alarm buttons. Add aux. Inc. map.

If the priority is high. views. maps. click Cameras to front. groups. monitor. monitors. To display a map screen when cameras. and/or server interfaces are on the desktop. click Server interfaces to front. To access an individual camera video screen that is “hiding. All the server setup or full interface screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. 6. 8. Use the scroll bar to access all the screens on the desktop. click Tile. and/or server interface screens as required. 4. and/or server interfaces are on the desktop. as well as the relative priority between SiteManager and other applications which may be running on the client. In addition. click 4x. To display 4 camera video screens in each row of the desktop. 3-242 24-10248-56 Rev. click 1x. click Views to front. click 2x. To display 2 camera video screens in each row of the desktop. To arrange the displayed camera video screens in tiles. All the map screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. All the view screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. as required. 9. 7. To display a camera video screen when maps. For information on displaying: • • • • • Camera video screens. display of video (cameras. To display 1 camera video screen in each row of the desktop. click Maps to front. see “Adding Map Resources” on page 3-158 View screens. and views) on the virtual video desktop will always be the first priority of the client. © 2011 Johnson Controls. All the camera video screens will be displayed as the top layer on the desktop. To arrange the displayed camera video screens in a cascade. 3. Use the scroll bar to access all the screens on the desktop. monitors. views. the administrator can choose the interface language and select the priority level of video display. 5. maps.  To configure your virtual video desktop: 1. monitors. Video display priority refers to the priority given to video decompression and display within the SiteManager application. map. . To display a server’s full or setup interface when cameras. views. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. see “Monitors” on page 3-199 Server interfaces. Inc. and/or monitors are on the desktop.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop SiteManager enables you to arrange the layout of the virtual video desktop. Display the camera video. view. 10. click Cascade. and/or server interfaces are on the desktop. Use the scroll bar to access all the screens on the desktop. Inc.” click on it to display it in front of the others. see “Working with the View Screen Options” on page 3-172 Monitor screens. To display a view screen when cameras. see “Server Setup and Full Interface” on page 3-42 2. see “Camera Video Screens” on page 3-102 Map screens.

24-10248-56 Rev. 11. simply repeat the step and when you select the option. monitor. you may choose to show or hide the log bar at the bottom of the Main screen. 13. select Window>Show monitors panel from the menu bar. a check mark will be displayed and the selected option will be enabled. map. select Window>Show log window from the menu bar. The Options – General tab window appears. 15. © 2011 Johnson Controls. To select the interface language or adjust the video display priority. click and drag the Level slide to the required position. In addition. select Window>Remember window positions from the menu bar. If you do wish for SiteManager to remember the window/screen positions (each screen will always be displayed in the top left hand corner of the virtual video desktop). NOTE If you wish to reverse any of the changes performed in steps 11 to 14.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager NOTE You can access all of the functions previously described before by selecting Window from the menu bar. view. If you do not wish to display the status bar. it will always be displayed in the top left-hand corner of the virtual video desktop. 12. or server interface screen. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Click Apply. select Window>Show status bar from the menu bar. Inc. 3-243 . Only the administrator can access the Tools menu. If you do not wish to display the log window. You can also click and drag any of the screens to a specific position on the desktop. To adjust the video display priority. 16. If you do not wish to display the monitor panel. 14. select Tools>Options from the menu bar. When you choose to show a camera video. Inc.

19. This is accomplished by recording the SiteManager desktop upon manual activation or in response to a triggered alarm for the duration of the alarm. To optimize the client’s CPU usage by verifying that cameras displayed on the virtual video desktop are turned off when not in view. select the required language from the Language drop-down list. . the client’s CPU usage will be higher) deselect the Enable automatic turn off of hidden video streams check box. 18.avi format and will be stored in the location as specified by the administrator. select the Enable automatic turn off of hidden video streams check box (the client’s CPU usage will be lower). The Options window will close.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 17. click OK. For all cameras to be turned on at all times when displayed on the virtual video desktop. To change the language of the interface. or an alarm event can be configured to automatically turn on the screen camera upon triggering of the event’s alarm. If the screen camera has been configured as an action for an alarm event and an Alarm Manager notification is received. Click Apply. the user will not be able to acknowledge the alarm until the system log (and the alarms management panel) is displayed. even when they are not in view (i. Click OK on the Options – General tab window. If desktop recording is activated manually. The administrator can manually activate desktop recording. 21. When the Information message displays. 3-244 24-10248-56 Rev. The screen camera footage is recorded in the . NOTE Only the administrator can access the Options window to activate or deactivate the screen recorder. and close SiteManager. Inc. user activity will be continuously recorded until the administrator manually deactivates desktop recording. Recording User’s Desktop Activity SiteManager enables the administrator to monitor any user’s activity on a SiteManager client. The screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time. the screen camera will be automatically turned on and will record all user activity for the duration of the alarm. 20. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. The interface language will be as specified. NOTE If the log window is not displayed and Alarm Manager has been configured to receive an acknowledgement from the user when an alarm is triggered. If you changed the language of the interface. log out. Launch and log into SiteManager as described in “Logging on to SiteManager” on page 3-3. © 2011 Johnson Controls. See “Managing Alarm Events” on page 3-80 for detailed information about the Alarms Management panel. Inc.e.

VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To manually activate desktop recording: SiteManager 1. He/she can also choose to set the login retry limit to 0. The screen camera footage can be reviewed at any time by locating the . 3.avi file in the configured destination drive and folder. See “Configuring the Window Recorder” on page 3-128 for detailed information. 2. select Tools>Stop desktop recording from the menu bar. 24-10248-56 Rev. including the administrator. Limiting Login Attempts SiteManager allows you to set a maximum number of times a user can enter an incorrect user name and password before SiteManager denies the person access and the software becomes disabled (lock-down) for a specific amount of time. 3-245 . See “Logging on to SiteManager” on page 3-3 for more information. To deactivate desktop recording. Inc. in which case there is no login limit – all users will have an unlimited number of attempts to enter their correct user name and password.  To configure the login attempts settings: 1. Verify that you have configured the screen recorder settings. From the menu bar. select Tools>Options. SiteManager allows 3 login attempts and a has lock-down period of 10 minutes.” the screen recorder settings are not configured correctly. 4. If the system log lists the message “Cannot start screen recorder. IMPORTANT During the lock-down period. no users. Inc. select Tools>Start desktop recording. Only the administrator can access the Options window and configure the login retry and lock settings. © 2011 Johnson Controls. From the menu bar. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. NOTE By default. can log on to SiteManager.

SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual The Options window (General tab) appears. However. select the maximum number of times a user can enter his/her user name and password to login. Inc. The Options window (General tab) appears. A sitemanagerlog. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3. . 3-246 24-10248-56 Rev. In the Login retry limit field.  To configure the system log: 1. Configuring the System Log SiteManager allows you to select tasks and events you wish to log into the system log. the procedure in this section only describes how to configure a database using the sitemanagerlog. NOTE Only the administrator can configure the system log settings. From the menu bar. allowing the administrator to save the system log in a database. © 2011 Johnson Controls.mdb file. enter the number of minutes the system will be in lockout mode when a user’s login attempts exceed the maximum allowed. 2. You can then select to save the system log as a file in a particular directory and folder and/or in a database. In the Lockout duration (minutes) field.mdb file is automatically uploaded when SiteManager is installed. 4. Click OK or Apply. select Tools>Options. The administrator can use a different database. Inc.

• 4. skip to step 4. Click the Browse button (.. Click OK and skip to step 13. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. select the Log on database check box and continue with step 5. Select the Log tab. only the administrator can manually search through all the log entries or use a keyword search... To save the system log in a database. 5. 3-247 . To save the system log in a database. 6. SiteManager 3.) next to the field. verify the Log on file check box is selected. only the administrator can perform advanced log entry searches. Click the Browse button (. • • You can save the system log both as a file and in a database. If the system log is configured to be saved in a database. To save the system log as a file..VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 2.) next to the field and select the preferred directory and folder where you wish to save the system log. If the system log is configured to be saved as a file.0 OLE DB Provider and click Next. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. The Data Link properties (Provider tab) dialog box appears. Select Microsoft Jet 4.

The Connection tab appears. Therefore. . The SiteManager. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Locate and select the sitemanagerlog. 3-248 24-10248-56 Rev. 7.mdb file. 8. Click Test Connection on the on the Data Link Properties window (Connection tab).mdb file is automatically uploaded when SiteManager is installed.0 OLE DB Provider option. 10. the file will be located in the SiteManager folder specified at the time of installation. The Select Access Database dialog box appears. Inc. 9. Click Open.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE The current version of SiteManager only supports the Microsoft Jet 4. © 2011 Johnson Controls.) next to the Select or enter a database name field.. Click the Browse button (. Inc..

Once you have selected and/or deselected all of the necessary log entries. the administrator can manually search through all the log entries or use a keyword search. Log Explorer and Working with the Log Panel SiteManager allows you to work with and search through the system log via the Log explorer. Entries selected in the File column will be logged and saved in the log file. Click OK on the Data Link Properties window (Connection tab). The Advanced log options window appears. 14. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. 12.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If the test was successful. 11. 15. the following dialog box appears. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. • • • Entries selected in the Window column will be logged and displayed in the log panel. If the system log is configured to be saved in a database. Inc. verify the check box is selected in the correct box and column. If the system log is configured to be saved as a file. For each entry that you wish to be logged. click OK. Click OK. SiteManager If a data link error occurs. Click Advanced on the Options window (Log tab). 24-10248-56 Rev. This section also includes details about how to work with the Main screen log panel. 16. including automatic playback of video footage recorded in response to an alarm event. the following dialog box appears. 3-249 . Entries selected in the Database column will be logged and saved in the log database. the administrator can perform advanced log entry searches as described in this section. A data link error may occur if a wrong user name and/or password are used. 13. Click OK or Apply. One advantage of working with the system log in a database via the Log explorer is the ability to work with the system’s resources.

click the Split log file icon NOTE When the log file size exceeds 1 MB. click the Refresh icon 4. the system log settings must be configured first. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The Log explorer window appears. 3.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE Only the administrator can work with the Log explorer. To update the retrieved log entries. Inc. From the menu bar. 2.  To work with the log explorer (configured for log on file): 1. To split the log into separate files.g. The search is not case sensitive.  To work with the log explorer (configured for log on database): 1. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. From the menu bar. select Tools>Log explorer. The Log explorer window appears. . select Tools>Log explorer. . These files are saved in the SiteManager directory selected during installation (e. Inc. However. C:\Program Files\JCI\Site Manager). Also. the file will automatically split into two separate log files. each log file is saved with a numeric code that represents the capture date and time. 3-250 24-10248-56 Rev. To view the system log entries: • • Use the scroll bar on the right hand side or Enter the desired entry keyword in the text box and click the magnifying glass icon . .

Log On Database Tab This tab consists of many fields and buttons that enable you to retrieve log entries. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Click the Log on database tab. Use the fields and buttons on this tab to retrieve the desired log entries. See “Log On Database Tab” for information on using the tab to retrieve entries. view detailed information about each entry. The Log explorer (Database) window appears. 3-251 . Inc.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 2. 3. and modify a resource (depending on the entry category). The Log on database tab can be categorized into the following:          Entry categories Refresh button User and Type drop-down lists Time period Search by Entry selection table Log entry description Entry key and value Resource 24-10248-56 Rev. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.

Also. Enables you to find an entry by searching for a description keyword. Select a row within the table allows you to view additional information in the Log entry description box and the Entry key and value box. Inc. all category buttons are deselected. Search by The search will not be successful if there is a spelling mistake. Enables you to view the activity of a particular user within the selected entry categories. As a result. © 2011 Johnson Controls. you may modify the 3-252 24-10248-56 Rev. By default. . Inc. If applicable. deselect the button of the category you wish to remove. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. entries corresponding to that category will be removed. modify the Start and End drop-down calendars to select the preferred time period. Allows you to view entries that occurred between specific dates. so that the category button is no longer highlighted. In addition. Refresh button User drop-down list Type drop-down list Time period Updates the retrieved log entries. the search is not case sensitive. Enter the keyword in the Search by field and click the magnifying glass icon . Allows you to select the type of activity you wish to view within the selected categories. if the entry has a resource. which can be applied using Local Time (LT) or Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Entry selection table Lists the results of the log entry search.SiteManager Entry categories VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Refresh button Time period Search by User and Type drop-down lists Entry selection table Log entry description Entry key and value Resource Entry categories Allows you to view log entries that correspond to one or more selected categories. To remove a category from the retrieved entries.

 To work with the log panel: 1. . and 3D maps. select the Alarm and Camera categories. select the Log actions tab. The log panel appears. alarms. From the menu bar. On the Main screen. Inc. SiteManager must receive an alarm notification from the server of the triggered alarm to have access to automatic playback of a camera's Alarm sector video footage in the Log explorer. user and type. Displays the selected entry’s corresponding entry key(s) and value(s). Configuring Regular Server Status Checks SiteManager allows you to configure any server with a regular automatic check that can detect:   If the server is offline Any disconnected cameras 3-253 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. All the logged system events and tasks will be displayed. To determine which cameras recorded an alarm event. 2. Log entry description Entry key and value Resource Displays the exact system log entry description for the selected category. This feature is only available when one or more of the following categories are selected: cameras. Right-click on the resource to change its status. NOTE When an alarm is triggered. Inc. views.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager resource’s status by right-clicking on the resource and selecting an option from the pop-up menu. 2D maps. select Window>Show log window if the option is not currently selected. auxes. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Allows you to work with a resource.

 To configure a server with automatic status checks: 1. verify that the Check for active alarms check box is selected. Using the Check every fields. Select the Servers tab. Select the Check server status periodically check box. and click Open. verify that the Check for connection check box is selected.. The Server window appears.e. 6. verify that the Check for disconnected cameras check box is selected. or select the server in the hierarchy window and select Server>Edit server from the menu bar. . To check whether there are any active alarms at the server. To have an audio alert when the status check detects a problem.. whether there are any video inputs that do not have a camera connected). To check whether any cameras are physically disconnected at the server (i. 4. Inc. To check whether the server is online and whether the SiteManager client could establish a network connection to the server. 5. Select the Status check tab. Right-click on the server in the hierarchy window and select Edit server. locate and select the audio file you wish to use for the alert. 7. 3. 9. The minimum length of time between each check is 1 minute. select the time interval at which the server’s status will be automatically checked.SiteManager Any active alarms VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  The user controls the regularity of the status checks and the parameters that should be checked for each server. click the Browse button (. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 8. 3-254 24-10248-56 Rev. 2.).

the following appears in the Server alert panel. 3-255 . If disconnected cameras are detected. Monitoring the Server Status Checks To monitor the status checks. If a server is offline. Click OK on the Status check tab. as long as the server is online. Inc. display the Server alert panel in the log window. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. verify that the Reset server connection if disconnected check box is selected. 11. the following appears in the Server alert panel. If you set the number to 0. 24-10248-56 Rev. SiteManager will continuously attempt to establish a connection with an offline server until one is achieved. If active alarms are detected. Then enter the number of reconnection attempts in the Number of retries (set to 0 for infinite) field. The server’s status will be checked immediately and at the specified time intervals thereafter. These will be updated according to the specified time interval. NOTE If you are not connected to the server at the time of the server’s status check. the server will display “Checking status…” next to its icon in the hierarchy window. each server is allocated a row and only the last server status check results are displayed. To set the number of times SiteManager will attempt to reconnect to a DVN server if the application becomes disconnected. On the panel.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 10. the following appears in the Server alert panel. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc. SiteManager will not attempt to establish a connection with an offline server. If the Reset server connection if disconnected check box is deselected. NOTE Disconnected cameras can be detected even if the SiteManager client is not currently connected to the server.

the Server alert panel will be automatically displayed if the log window is shown. Enter the name of the resource in the Search window. The search is not case sensitive. appears in the Server alert panel when SiteManager detects The yellow flag icon an active alarm and/or disconnected cameras at the server. click Find again. Views. The find function does not search through the entire configuration – only the hierarchy currently displayed in the hierarchy window. appears in the Server alert panel when SiteManager detects that The red flag icon the server is offline. SiteManager offers a search function that enables you to find a particular resource within a hierarchy. Select the hierarchy you would like to search by clicking on the Servers. see “Configuring the Virtual Video Desktop” on page 3-242 for detailed information. Inc. NOTE The search will not be successful if there is a spelling mistake. Inc. Maps.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Flag Icon Descriptions The green flag icon appears in the Server alert panel when SiteManager detects no issues with the server. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The selected hierarchy appears in the hierarchy window. SiteManager will search the hierarchy for a match and will display the hit in the hierarchy window. The next hit will be displayed in the hierarchy window. The search is word/symbol-based and it will display any resource with the word and/or symbol as a hit. or Monitors tab. 3-256 24-10248-56 Rev. . Groups. Searching the Hierarchies As there may be hundreds of resources in any one or all of the hierarchies. according to the types of checks enabled on the Server window (Status check tab). If a red flag is detected during a status check. 2. If the first hit does not produce the required resource. To display the log window. 3. Click Find.  To search a hierarchy: 1.

B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. In the Rate drop-down list. select Tools>Options. 2. Once you have connected the proprietary keyboard to the SiteManager client. select the Input devices tab. you must perform the following procedure to use the keyboard. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-257 .7 and higher) supports the following functions of the Pelco® 9760 keyboard.  To configure proprietary keyboard settings: 1. 5. From the menu bar.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 4. select the keyboard model. easy. Click OK or Apply. which you can only use from a SiteManager client:  Sending live video from a camera connected to the DVN 5000 to any DVN 100-NET (decoder mode) or analog monitor Video playback from a selected camera on a selected monitor  24-10248-56 Rev. NOTE Only the administrator can configure the proprietary keyboard. Repeat until the resource is located or refine your search. Inc. Pelco® 9760 Keyboard Integration The DVN 5000 (software Release 2. 4. 3. Inc. Select the Console keyboard check box. select the port to which the keyboard is connected. In the Model drop-down list. 7. 6. SiteManager Configuring Proprietary Keyboard Settings Proprietary keyboards allow quick. and user-friendly access to SiteManager functions and provide an alternative to the standard mouse and keyboard controls. On the Options window. In the Port drop-down list. select the keyboard’s transfer rate.

3-258 24-10248-56 Rev. Inc. you will need a full duplex RS-485 to RS-232 converter (B&B Electronics Model 485OT9L recommended).SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual NOTE DVN 100-NET cameras can only be played back if they are set as network cameras in the DVN 5000. Before you begin the installation. For comprehensive instructions associated with the keyboard. . configuration. verify that you have all the Pelco keyboard package contents (refer to the Pelco 9760-KBD Installation and Configuration Manual). and operation instructions of the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with a SiteManager client. refer to the Pelco 9760-KBD Installation and Configuration Manual. Inc.  Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) with variable speed control NOTE Setting Presets and other PTZ functions must be performed at the DVN 5000. © 2011 Johnson Controls. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. You cannot use this keyboard locally at the DVN server. NOTE You can only use the Pelco 9760 keyboard on a workstation running DVN SiteManager software. This section provides basic installation. In addition. Installing the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard Figure 3-2 illustrates how to install a Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with a SiteManager client.

run a cable from the converter to the COM port using a properly wired DB9F connector. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager Figure 3-2: Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard Installation  To install the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard: 1. Connect the converter to a COM port on the computer running SiteManager. Set all of the keyboard’s DIP switches to OFF. 3-259 . Connect one end of the RJ-45 reversed cable to the System connector on the power adapter. Inc. 4. 2.  To install the converter: 1. Connect the keyboard’s RJ-45 straight cable from the COM 1 port on the keyboard to the Keyboard connector on the power adapter. If the converter cannot be securely connected to the computer’s COM port. Wire the other end of the cable to the RS-485 to RS-232 converter according to “B&B Electronics RS-232 to RS-485 (Model 485OT9L) Converter Installation” on page 259. B&B Electronics RS-232 to RS-485 (Model 485OT9L) Converter Installation This device converts RS-485 signals to RS-232 signals and must be used when installing a Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard to a PC running SiteManager. Inc. 24-10248-56 Rev. 3. Set set the converter’s baud rate to 4800 by changing the DIP switch settings 1-4 according to the following chart. © 2011 Johnson Controls.

When using a standard RJ-45 CAT-5 cable. Set the remaining switch positions for RS-485 Full-Duplex operation and termination. DIP Switches DB9F Connector 12345678 RJ-45 Reversed Cable PIN Layout Pin 7 (Rx-) Pin 8 (Rx+) Pin 2 (Tx-) Pin 1 (Tx+) To SiteManager Workstation RS-232 to RS-485 Converter (B&B Electronics Model 485OT9L) TDA(-) TDB(+) RDA(-) RDB(+) 422/485 GND 12VDC + – Figure 3-3: RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Diagram (RJ-45 Reversed Cable) 4. 2 twisted pair) or equivalent. Switch 5 OFF Switch 6 OFF Switch 7 OFF Switch 8 OFF 3. shielded. Inc. . Using Belden® 5341FE (18 AWG. wire the device according to Figure 3-4.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Baud Rate 4800 Switch 1 ON Switch 2 OFF Switch 3 OFF Switch 4 OFF 2. 3-260 24-10248-56 Rev. wire the pins from the RJ-45 reversed cable to the converter’s terminal block according to Figure 3-3. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Inc.

Inc.   To configure the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard as an input device in SiteManager: 1. From the menu bar. 3-261 . Select the Input devices tab. select the COM port to which the converter is connected. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Assigning unique IDs to cameras and monitors in SiteManager. 24-10248-56 Rev. In the Port drop-down list. 6. 4. 2. In the Model drop-down list. select 4800 bps. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. In the Rate drop-down list. Inc. Configuring the keyboard consists of the following series of steps:  Configuring the keyboard as an input device and setting the COM port and baud rate in SiteManager. Select the Console keyboard check box. select Tools>Options.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager DB9F Connector DIP Switches 12345678 RJ-45 CAT-5 Cable PIN Layout Orange (Rx-) Orange/White (Rx+) Brown/White (Tx-) Brown (Tx+) To SiteManager Workstation RS-232 to RS-485 Converter (B&B Electronics Model 485OT9L) TDA(-) TDB(+) RDA(-) RDB(+) 422/485 GND 12VDC + – Figure 3-4: RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Diagram (RJ-45 CAT-5 Cable) Configuring the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard The following instructions describe how to configure the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with SiteManager. 3. select PELCO-9760. The Options dialog box appears. enabling you to select the cameras and monitors from the Pelco keyboard. 5.

 To assign unique IDs to the cameras and monitors in SiteManager: 1. In SiteManager. Inc. . 3-262 24-10248-56 Rev. Repeat steps 3-4 for each camera you wish to control from the Pelco keyboard. 4. Click OK. Refer to the Pelco 9760-KBD Installation and Configuration Manual for more detailed information on logging on. Assign a Unique ID number to the camera and click OK. Inc. Right-click over the camera and select Edit resource. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 7. 5. Select the Monitors tab on the left pane. select the Servers tab. 6. The Resource properties dialog box appears. The Monitor or VGA Monitor dialog box appears.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 7. 3. Right-click over a monitor and select Edit monitor. 2. Log on to the Pelco keyboard by entering your four-digit PIN from the Log In Display. © 2011 Johnson Controls. Select a camera under one of the servers.

Press the CAM key. Assign a Unique ID number to the monitor and click OK. 4.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual SiteManager 8. Repeat steps 7-8 for each monitor you wish to select from the Pelco keyboard. This number corresponds to the unique ID assigned to a monitor in SiteManager. From the keyboard. From the keyboard. 3-263 . In the previous example. it becomes the selected camera for all other operations from the keyboard. press the number of the camera you wish to assign to the currently selected monitor. 2. Inc. Press the MON key. 9. This number corresponds to the unique ID assigned to a camera in SiteManager. Press the CAM key. The selected camera appears on the currently selected monitor. NOTE Once you select a camera to be displayed on a monitor. 3. Inc. From the keyboard. The following functions are supported:    Selecting a camera and monitor on the keyboard Changing the camera on the current monitor Playing back video on the current monitor  To select a camera and monitor on the keyboard: 1. press the number of the camera you wish to assign to the selected monitor (Example: 1). the camera with a unique ID of 1 in SiteManager would be assigned to the monitor with a unique ID of 1. 24-10248-56 Rev.  To change the camera on the current monitor: 1. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 2. press the number of the monitor you wish to select (Example: 1). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Operating the Pelco 9760-KBD Keyboard The following instructions describe how to operate the Pelco 9760-KBD keyboard for use with SiteManager.

even when a client has been configured to save the configuration in a shared location. SiteManager allows to save the configuration either locally or in a shared location on the network. which will allow for automatic updates of all SiteManager clients present on the network. Note the following:  A copy of the configuration is always created locally by default.dat) in the SiteManager folder (the location of this folder depends on the selection made at the time of SiteManager’s installation). A user can deny a configuration synchronization request when prompted.dat and sitemanager. all SiteManager configuration settings are stored as two separate files (Users. Synchronization of configurations can occur automatically or manually at the request of a user.   3-264 24-10248-56 Rev.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To play back video on the current monitor: 1. all of the network-connected SiteManager clients who use the shared location will be alerted and allowed to synchronize with the changes. Inc. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. When a configuration change occurs and the configuration is saved in a shared location. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Press one of the multi-purpose function keys on the keyboard according to Table 3-14 to play back video on the current monitor: Table 3-14: Function Keys Symbol |> > >> >>> < << <<< <-* * *-> Playback Function Play Fast Forward (2x current speed) Fast Forward (4x current speed) Fast Forward (8x current speed) Playback (2x current speed) Playback (4x current speed) Playback (8x current speed) Go to beginning of video Stop playback and go to live video Go to end of video Managing the SiteManager Configuration By default. Inc.

Inc. 4. © 2011 Johnson Controls. If the changes made completely exclude user account settings.. From the menu bar. the sitemanager. Select the appropriate radio button for each data type. click Yes when the following message appears: 24-10248-56 Rev. • 2. you do not need to perform any synchronization. Inc. If the changes made only include user account settings. If any configuration files are saved in a shared location. you will be automatically logged off. the Users. 2. If the changes made included both user account and general settings.. After saving the configuration changes. If you selected the Shared folder radio button.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To select the location for the saved configuration files: 1.  To save and synchronize the configuration files: 1. the Users.dat and the sitemanager. SiteManager 3. Click OK or Apply on the Configuration tab.dat files (as well as the backup) will be updated accordingly. and if a user is currently logged into SiteManager on a client that also uses the same shared location for saving the configuration files. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls.) and select the location where the data will be stored and click OK. select User>Save configuration now from the menu bar to save the configuration. Decide whether the User accounts data and Site configuration data will be stored on the local drive or in a shared folder. • • • The configuration will be saved in the selected location. 5. 3-265 . click the Browse button (. Select the Configuration tab.dat files (as well as the backup) will be updated accordingly. 6. select Tools>Options. Log on to SiteManager again. If all the configuration files are saved locally. Assuming that certain configuration changed occurred.dat files (as well as their backups) will be updated accordingly.

then only user account settings will be synchronized and applied. a faulty ActiveX control may be the cause of the problem. Only the administrator may access the ActiveX window and therefore use the VisionWeb ActiveX Manager. 3-266 24-10248-56 Rev. 3. certain software components (DVN 5000 Series Web and DVN 3000 Series Web ActiveX) must be present and properly installed on a client machine. then only site configuration settings will be synchronized and applied. the newly saved configuration will be loaded automatically. © 2011 Johnson Controls. The synchronized configuration settings will be applied. but the client uses the same shared location for saving the configuration files. Inc.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual If any configuration files are saved in a shared location. If you are unable to connect to a server from SiteManager or via VisionWeb interface. The configuration will be synchronized and the user will be logged out. once the user logs onto SiteManager. Log on to SiteManager again. • VisionWeb ActiveX Manager For SiteManager to function correctly. . VisionWeb ActiveX Manager provides you with ActiveX components information and an interface that allows their management (installation and removal). B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. If the client you are currently logged into only shares user accounts files. and if a user is not currently logged onto SiteManager. Inc. Note that it is recommended that versions of ActiveX components installed on a client machine and Johnson Controls DVMS server match for best performance. • If the client you are currently logged onto only shares site configuration files.

click the Delete icon. If you are unable to connect to a server. The Web update window appears. The ActiveX window will close. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 7. 6. If you wish to refresh the ActiveX control. To delete the ActiveX control. click the Refresh icon. The VisionWeb ActiveX Manager window appears. The ActiveX Manager will automatically update the data on the screen. the next time you are updating the control a Security Warning window will be displayed. The ActiveX Manager will update the selected ActiveX control. You may be required to delete an ActiveX control if it is an old or an incompatible version.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual  To use VisionWeb ActiveX Manager: SiteManager 1. (The path will guide you to its exact location within the directory). Update Refresh Delete 2. You may also delete the required ActiveX control in the system directory. click the Update icon. From the menu bar. Click the Cross in the top right hand corner of the ActiveX window. NOTE If an ActiveX control is deleted/uninstalled. 5. Enter the IP address and click OK. 3-267 . select Tools>VisionWeb ActiveX Manager. 24-10248-56 Rev. updating the corresponding ActiveX control may resolve the problem. Inc. Click Yes to update/install the selected ActiveX control. Click the Name of the ActiveX control you wish to adjust. 3. To update the ActiveX control. 4. The ActiveX Manager will automatically uninstall and remove the selected ActiveX control. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc.

Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls.SiteManager VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual 3-268 24-10248-56 Rev. . B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc.

3-44 server setup screen 3-42 Accounts creating user 3-13 editing admin 3-11 Activating server resources 3-46 ActiveX Information 3-266 Add Alarm (Map) 3-143 Add Alarm Toolbar Option 3-8 Add Aux (Map) 3-143 Add Aux Toolbar Option 3-8 Add Camera (Map) 3-143 Add Camera Toolbar Option 3-8 Add Resource 3-131. 3-167. 2-27 Audio Channels 3-53 maximum supported 3-44 Audio Mute 3-111 Audio Specification 3-54 Authenticate Exported Video 3-196 Authenticating video clips 3-126 Autoconnect 3-19. 3-142. 3-232 Audio 3-203 adjusting volume 3-55 listening to 3-54 muting channels 3-55 playing back 3-114 playing back (VP) 2-16 playing back on monitors 3-218 support with quad view 3-228 Audio (VP) 2-2. 3-229 resources to monitor groups 3-235 resources to VGA monitors 3-208 servers 3-20 VGA monitor resources 3-209– 3-210 Adjusting audio volume 3-55 PTZ camera focus/iris 3-108 video display priority 3-243 Admin Accounts changing password 3-12 creating multiple 3-13 editing 3-11 Alarm Call Priority 3-56. 3-90 Alarm Notifications backup plan 3-79 Alarm Screen (VP) 2-2 Alarm Sector 3-113. 3-196 About audio (VP) 2-27 groups 3-130 log explorer 3-249 maps 3-141 monitor groups 3-233 monitors 3-199 notes 1-3 servers in SiteManager 3-18 SiteManager 1-2. 3-186 Alarms configuring notification settings 3-79 defining max number 3-79 enabling audible 3-74 log window tab 3-9 maximum supported 3-44 send email on 3-77 silencing server 3-100 triggering emails from 3-59 triggering screen recorder 3-59 turning off triggered 3-74 Alarms (VP) 2-30 Alarms Management Panel 3-63 Alert Panel icon descriptions 3-256 Assigning cameras to quadrants 3-230. Index-1 .INDEX Index entries with (VP) are specific to VisionPocket. 3-81. 3-173. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. Inc. 3-201 Autoconnection 3-174 24-10248-56 Rev. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-1 user management 3-11 views 3-165 virtual video desktop 3-239 VisionPocket 1-1 VisionWeb ActiveX Manager 3-266 Accessing monitors 3-201 RemoteControl full interface 3-42. 3-211. 3-214 Add View 3-143 Adding camera to network monitor 3-213 cameras to views 3-178 group resources 3-132 map resources 3-158 maps to views 3-178 network monitors 3-205. 3-131. 3-167. 3-234 to sequence 3-200 Add Resource Methods 3-209. Numerics 1 to 1 Ratio displaying 2D map in 3-144 1x Toolbar Option 3-8 2D Map Screen 3-142 buttons and features 3-143 2D Maps 3-141 adding resources to 3-158 creating 3-146 deleting 3-149 resource menu options 3-155 resource status 3-157 resources 3-155 using 3-150 2x Toolbar Option 3-8 3D Map Screen 3-144 buttons and features 3-145 3D Map Toolbar Option 3-8 3D Maps 3-141 adding resources to 3-158 creating 3-146 deleting 3-149 resource menu options 3-156 resource status 3-157 resources 3-155 supported file formats 3-144 using 3-151 view options 3-152 4x Toolbar Option 3-8 A Aborting video clip export 3-127. 3-80– 3-81 Alarm Events 3-86–3-87. Inc. 3-90 configuring 3-64 list of actions 3-68 managing 3-80 managing with multiple operations 3-99 Alarm Manager 3-56. 3-142. 3-86–3-87. 3-62 managing notifications 3-63.

3-131. 3-202. 3-131. 3-142. 3-138–3-139. . 3-234 Connect to Server 3-69 Connecting monitor group 3-236 regions in quad view 3-233 to network monitors 3-217 to servers 3-38 to servers (VP) 2-4 Connection Manager (VP) 2-3 Connection Quality 3-20 Controlling PTZ camera domes 3-106 Converter RS-232 to RS-485 3-259 CPU Usage optimizing 3-244 Creating maps 3-146 monitor groups 3-234 multiple admin accounts 3-13 new groups 3-131 servers 3-20 user accounts 3-13 views 3-170 Cycle Alarmed Cameras 3-72 D Date/Time Search 3-111. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-142. 3-102 functions 3-101 using options of 3-103 using toolbar on 3-109 Cameras adding to network monitor 3-213 adding to views 3-178 assigning to quadrants 3-230. 3-167. 3-167. 3-241 Bring Maps to Front 3-8. 3-172. 3-174. 3-241 Bring Views to Front 3-8. 3-232 VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual controlling PTZ (VP) 2-11 controlling PTZ domes 3-106 displaying 3-50 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 maximum supported 3-44 playing back multiple synchronized 3-184 removing from network monitors 3-216 resolution limits with quad view 3-228 selecting (VP) 2-2. 3-156. 3-241 Broadband Connections editing 3-33 Buttons 2D map screen 3-143 3D map screen 3-145 of cam video screen toolbar 3-110 of virtual video desktop 3-240 on main screen 3-6 on monitor panel 3-202 on sequence screen 3-205 on view screen 3-169 Buttons and Features (VP) 2-2 C Calendar 2-21 Camera Cycling support with quad view 3-228 Camera Domes configuring control settings of 3-52 using auxiliaries of 3-51 Camera Sectors selecting 3-113 Camera Unit 3-169 Camera Video Screen 3-6. 3-183. 3-184 Delete Server 3-19 Delete View 3-167 Deleting ActiveX controls 3-267 camera from network monitors 3-216 groups 3-132 layout units 3-177 layouts 3-177 maps 3-149 network monitors 3-226 server connections 3-35 servers 3-41 user accounts 3-16 VGA monitor resources 3-212 VGA monitors 3-226 views 3-171 Denying configuration sync request 3-264 Descriptions of flag icons 3-256 Index-2 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-134. 3-155–3-156. 3-200 Autozoom 3-144 Auxiliaries editing names of 3-52 maximum supported 3-44 turning off 3-52 turning on 3-52 using camera internal 3-51 Auxiliaries (VP) 2-30 AVI Files described 3-121 B Background Color 3-146 Bandwidth image quality effect on 3-20 Bandwidth Considerations (VP) 2-7 Bitmap 2-22 Blank Feature 3-200 BMP Files compared to JPEGs 3-120 Bring Cameras to Front 3-8. 3-240 Changing admin password 3-12 camera on monitor 3-263 interface language 3-243 quad to single view 3-229 server IP address 3-26 single to quad view 3-229 user passwords 3-17 Channels audio 3-53 Chapter Summaries 1-2 Check for Active Alarms 3-254 Check for Connection 3-254 Check for Disconnected Cameras 3-254 CIF Resolution (VP) 2-7 Closing SiteManager 3-11 VisionPocket 2-3 Colors background for 3D maps 3-146 Compatibility DVN servers and monitors 3-218 Compression 3-195 video clip 3-126 Configuration saving SiteManager 3-10 Configuration Options quad view 3-231 Configuring alarm call priority 3-56 alarm events 3-64 alarm notification settings 3-79 dome control settings 3-52 Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-261 proprietary keyboard settings 3-257 quad view feature 3-228 screen recorder 3-59 send email settings 3-77 server connections 3-18 SMTP settings 3-59 system log 3-246 virtual video desktop 3-242 window recorder 3-128 Connect 3-19. 3-241 Bring Server Interfaces to Front 3-8. 3-164. Inc. 3-140.Index Autodisplay 3-19. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-116 monitor panel 3-204 Default Login Attempts 3-245 Defining max alarms 3-79 Delete Group 3-131 Delete Map 3-141 Delete Monitor 3-201 Delete Monitor Group 3-233 Delete Resource 3-134. 2-6 unassigning from quadrants 3-232 using identical names 3-49 using PTZ (VP) 2-9 Cascade 3-8. 3-47–3-48. Inc. 3-162.

2-22– 2-23 video clips 3-122. 3-155–3-156. 3-141. 3-167. Inc. 3-139. 3-162. 2-31 Export Selection Fields 3-195 Export Server 3-19 Exporting Index AVI files 3-121 MP4 files 3-121 MS Mpeg4 V3 AVI files 3-121 servers 3-25 still images 3-121. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-155–3-156. 3-203. 3-48. 3-163. 3-188 still images (VP) 2-2. 3-173 G Grab a Picture (VP) 2-3 Green Flag 3-256 Group Menu 3-7 Group View Toolbar Option 3-8 Grouping resources 3-130 Groups about 3-130 adding resources to 3-132 creating new 3-131 deleting 3-132 menu options 3-130 monitor 3-233 resource menu options 3-134 status of resources 3-135 using resources in 3-134 Groups Tab 3-8 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-138 Disconnect from Server 3-69 Disconnect Map 3-138 Disconnect View 3-138 Disconnecting from server (VP) 2-5 from servers 3-40 monitors 3-218 regions in quad view 3-233 Display Four Cameras 3-241 Display Single Camera 3-240 Display Two Cameras 3-240 Displaying 2D map in 1 to 1 ratio 3-144 alarm acknowledge window 3-75 cameras 3-50 cameras on monitors 3-218 cameras on network monitors 3-214 cameras on VGA monitors 3-208 four images on spot monitor 3-227 maps on VGA monitors 3-208 resources on VGA monitors 3-216 setup screen (VP) 2-2 views on VGA monitors 3-209 Documentation 1-4 Domes configuring control settings of 3-52 controlling PTZ 3-106 DVN 100-NET adding network monitors for 3-229 configuring quad view feature 3-228 full interface support 3-42 network monitors 3-201 quad view feature 3-227 server setup support 3-42 sync multiple camera playback 3-185 using views with 3-166 DVN 3000 exporting video clips 3-122 sync multiple camera playback 3-185 using views with 3-166 E Edit 2D Map 3-163 Edit Alarm Resource 3-140 Edit Aux Resource 3-140 Edit Camera Resource 3-48 Edit Group 3-131 Edit Map 3-138. 3-234 Disconnect (VP) 2-3 Disconnect All 3-19 Disconnect All Servers 3-69 Disconnect Camera 3-47. 3-190 F Fast Forward 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Features 2D map screen 3-143 3D map screen 3-145 cam video screen toolbar 3-110 main screen 3-6 monitor panel 3-202 sequence screen 3-205 view screen 3-169 virtual video desktop 3-240 File Formats supported for 3D maps 3-144 Find Image 3-170 Find Screen (VP) 2-2 Find Video Clip 3-170 Finding images (VP) 2-19 still images 3-116 still images on monitors 3-221 video clips 3-116 video clips on monitors 3-221 Fixed Split Size (MB) 3-196 Flag Icon Descriptions 3-256 Flat Shading 3-146 Focus 3-105 adjusting on PTZ cams 3-108 Focus Controls (VP) 2-10 Formats 3-120–3-121. 3-172 Edit View Layouts 3-167. 3-167. 3-77 Enabling audible alarms 3-74 audio (VP) 2-2 End Function (VP) 2-18 End of Archive 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 End Time 3-195 Enhance High Resolution MPEG 3-104 Enhance Video Quality 3-104 Enpacta support in quad view 3-228 Entry Categories 3-252 Entry Key and Value 3-253 Entry Selection Table 3-252 Events managing alarm 3-80 Exiting SiteManager 3-11 VisionPocket 2-3. 3-183. 3-138. 3-183 Edit Server 3-19 Edit View 3-139. 3-162.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Designing view screen layouts 3-175 Desktop Activity recording 3-244 Detecting disconnected cameras 3-253 when server is offline 3-253 Dial-Up editing server connections 3-27 Digital Zoom using (VP) 2-12 using on PTZ cameras 3-107 Direct Connections editing 3-31 Disconnect 3-19. 3-142. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-48. Inc. 3-183 Edit Monitor 3-200–3-201 Edit Monitor Group 3-233 Edit Resource 3-45. Index-3 . 3-42 Full Resolution (VP) 2-7 Full Screen 3-144. 3-134. 3-131. 3-134. 3-173 Editing admin account 3-11 auxiliary names 3-52 monitors 3-206 server broadband connections 3-33 server dial-up connections 3-27 server direct connections 3-31 server network connections 3-26 server properties 3-41 server VPN connections 3-29 user accounts 3-16 Emails alarm triggered 3-59. 3-172. 3-45. 3-167. 3-190 of still images (VP) 2-22–2-23 Forward Function (VP) 2-18 Full Interface 3-19.

3-99 alarm manager notifications 3-81. 3-172 Hierarchies searching 3-256 Hierarchy Window 3-6. Inc. 3-185 Maximum Quality 3-173 Maximum Speed 3-173 Menu Bar 3-7 Menu Buttons (VP) 2-3 Menu Options group resources 3-134 groups 3-130 maps 3-141 monitor groups 3-233 monitors 3-200 network monitors 3-201 server resources 3-45 Index-4 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-167. 3-162.Index H Help Menu 3-8 Hidden Lines 3-146 Hide Camera 3-47. 3-62 monitor groups 3-233 multiple resources 3-130 SiteManager configuration 3-264 Manual Conventions 1-3 Map Menu 3-7 Map Resources 3-155 Map Unit 3-169 Maps 2D screen 3-142 2D toolbar 3-142 3D screen 3-144 3D toolbar 3-144 about 3-141 adding resources to 3-158 adding to views 3-178 background (3D) 3-144 creating 3-146 deleting 3-149 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 menu options 3-141 positioning resources on 3-160 resource menu options (2D) 3-155 resource menu options (3D) 3-156 resource status 3-157 resources 3-197 supported file formats (3D) 3-144 using 3-150–3-151 using resources of 3-160 viewing area 3-142 viewing area (3D) 3-144 views (3D) 3-152 Maps Tab 3-8 Master Camera 3-169. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-183 Hide Sequence Screen 3-200 Hide View 3-138. 3-164 server resources 3-46 Image Formats 3-120 Image Quality effect on bandwidth 3-20 selecting (VP) 2-7 Image Resolution selecting (VP) 2-7 Images exporting (VP) 2-22–2-23 file type features of 3-120 finding (VP) 2-19 finding still 3-116 saving still (VP) 2-19 Import Server 3-19 Importing maps 3-146 servers 3-20 Include Text Insertion 3-195 Input Video Format 3-195 Inputs monitoring alarm (VP) 2-30 Installing Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-258 RS-232 to RS-485 converter 3-259 Integrating Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-257 Interface Language changing 3-243 Introduction 1-1 IP Address changing server 3-26 Iris 3-105 adjusting on PTZ cams 3-108 Iris Controls (VP) 2-10 ISDN Connection 3-22 J JPEG Files 2-22 compared to BMPs 3-120 VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual K Keyboard (Pelco 9760) configuration 3-261 installation 3-258 integration 3-257 operation 3-263 Keyboard PTZ Camera Control 3-108 Keyboard Settings 3-257 Keyboard Shortcuts (PTZ) 3-108 L LAN See Local Area Connection (LAN) Language changing interface 3-243 Layout Editor 3-175 Layout Menu 3-173 Layouts deleting 3-177 deleting units in 3-177 designing view screen 3-175 naming 3-177 Limitations Pelco 9760 integration 3-258 Limiting camera resolution 3-228 login attempts 3-245 Listening to audio 3-54 to audio (VP) 2-27 Live Audio listening to (VP) 2-27 Live Mode 3-204 Live Video viewing 3-199 viewing (VP) 2-6 Local Area Connection (LAN) server connection 3-22 Locating still images 3-116 video clips 3-116 Lock-Down 3-245 Log configuring system 3-246 Log Actions log window tab 3-9 Log Entry Description 3-253 Log Explorer about 3-249 Log Files splitting 3-250 Log On Database Tab 3-251 Log Panel using 3-249 Log Window Tabs 3-9 Logging On 3-3 limiting attempts when 3-245 VisionPocket 2-4 Logging Out 3-10 M Main Screen buttons and features 3-6 using 3-5 Main Screen (VP) 2-1 displaying 2-2 Maintenance 3-239 Managing ActiveX components 3-266 alarm events 3-80. 3-141 Hide Monitor Group 3-234 Hide Resource 3-45. 3-86– 3-87. 3-90 alarms 3-56. 3-134. 3-155–3-156. 3-9 I Icons 2D map resource 3-157 3D map resource 3-157 selecting size of 3-156. 3-137 Hide Group 3-131 Hide Map 3-137. Inc.

3-21 Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) 1-1. 3-169 monitor panel 3-204 Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-264 Playback Functions (VP) 2-18 Playback Pad (VP) 2-2 Playing Back multiple synchronized cameras 3-184 video (VP) 2-16 video and audio 3-114 video on monitors 3-218. 2-4. 3-204 Monitor Scroll Button 3-205 Monitor Toolbar Option 3-8 Monitoring alarm inputs/outputs (VP) 2-30 desktop activity 3-244 server status checks 3-255 Monitors about 3-199 adding cameras to network 3-213 adding network 3-205 adding resources to VGA 3-208–3-210 cameras displayed on 3-218 cameras displayed on network 3-214 cameras displayed on VGA 3-208 connecting to network 3-217 deleting network 3-226 disconnecting 3-218 displaying resources on VGA 3-216 drop-down list 3-202 editing 3-206 maps displayed on VGA 3-208 menu options 3-200 menu options for network 3-201 playing back video on 3-218. 3-201 buttons 3-202 features 3-202 playback commands 3-9. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-229 adding cameras to 3-213 cameras displayed on 3-214 connecting to 3-217 deleting 3-226 disconnecting 3-218 editing 3-206 grouping 3-233 menu options 3-201 panel options 3-202 playing back video on 3-218 removing camera from 3-216 Network Scanner (VP) 2-3 New 2D Map 3-144 New 3D Map 3-141 New Group 3-131 New Groups 3-131 New Map 3-141 New Monitor 3-201 New Monitor Group 3-233 New Server 3-19 New Server Toolbar Option 3-8 New View 3-167 Notes about 1-3 Notifications alarm 3-63 configuring alarm 3-79 managing alarm manager 3-81. 3-264 PNG See Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Portable Network Graphics (PNG) 2-22 Position Locked 3-156 Positioning resources on maps 3-160 resources on views 3-180 24-10248-56 Rev.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual VGA monitors 3-200 views 3-166 windows 3-241 Menus view 3-172 Modem Connection 3-22 Monitor Groups about 3-233 adding resources to 3-235 connecting 3-236 creating 3-234 menu options 3-233 Monitor Information 3-202–3-203 Monitor Menu 3-7 Monitor Mode 3-203–3-204 Monitor Panel 3-9. Inc. Inc. 3-86–3-87. 2-16 Plan View 3-145 Play Function (VP) 2-18 Play Mode (VP) 2-3 Playback selecting cam sectors for 3-113 support with quad view 3-228 synchronized multiple camera 3-220 Playback Commands 3-110. 3-90 O On Screen Display Text support with quad view 3-228 Open View Layout 3-167 Operating Pelco 9760 keyboards 3-263 Operations managing alarm events with 3-99 Optical Zoom using (VP) 2-12 using on PTZ cameras 3-107 Optimizing client CPU usage 3-244 Options connection quality 3-20 Outputs monitoring (VP) 2-30 Index P Pan/Tilt Controls (VP) 2-11 Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) 2-9 configuring 3-52 control with VisionPocket 2-2 controlling cameras 3-106 controlling cameras (VP) 2-11 keyboard shortcuts 3-108 Passwords changing admin 3-12 changing user 3-17 Pause Function (VP) 2-19 Pause Playback 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Pausing video clip export 3-127. 3-264 removing resources from VGA 3-212 searching still images on 3-221 searching video clips on 3-221 server compatibility 3-218 VGA 3-200 views displayed on VGA 3-209 Monitors Drop-Down List 3-9 Monitors Tab 3-9 Move 3-105 Move to Current Viewpoint 3-156 Moving PTZ camera domes 3-106 MP4 Files described 3-121 MPEG4 3-61 MS Mpeg4 V3 AVI Files described 3-121 Multiple Camera Playback 3-1 on VGA monitors 3-220 Mute Audio 3-49 Mute Option 3-45 Muting audio channels 3-55 N Name Reset Function 3-49 Naming layouts 3-177 Navigation Panel 3-146 Network editing server connections 3-26 Network Connection Options 3-23 Network Monitors 3-199. Index-5 . 3-201 adding 3-205. 3-196 PDA See Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) Pelco 9760 configuring 3-261 installing 3-258 keyboard integration 3-257 operating 3-263 Permissions user 3-15.

3-253 Resource Box 3-205 Resource Information 3-202– 3-203 Resource Options 2D maps 3-155 3D maps 3-156 Resource Status 3-135 Resources 2D maps 3-157 3D maps 3-157 adding to groups 3-132 adding to monitor groups 3-235 adding to sequences 3-200 adding to VGA monitors 3-208–3-210 adding to views 3-178 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 grouping 3-130 map 3-155. 3-156. Inc. 3-186 Prime Sector (VP) 2-16 Print Image 3-110 Proprietary Keyboard Settings 3-257 PTZ See Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) PTZ Camera Control on network monitors 3-214 on VGA monitors 3-208 PTZ Cameras (VP) 2-9 controlling 2-11 PTZ Control Button (VP) 2-2 PTZ Controls (VP) 2-6 PTZ Panel Screen (VP) using 2-9 Q QCIF Resolution (VP) 2-7 Quad View Feature 3-66. 2-23 video clips 3-122. 3-208 Sequence Mode 3-203 Sequence Resource Mode 3-207– 3-208. 3-48. 3-139. . 3-184. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-134. 3-105. 3-232 unassigning cameras from 3-232 Quality 3-19. 3-190 video footage on the fly 3-129 Screen Recorder configuring 3-59 Search Box 3-6. Inc. 3-164 Send Email 3-73 Send Email Alarm 3-77 Send to Monitor 3-45. 3-9 Search By 3-252 Search Recorded Footage (VP) 2-2 Searching images (VP) 2-19 resource hierarchies 3-256 still images on monitors 3-221 video clips on monitors 3-221 Sector Selection 3-110 Sectors 3-170 playing back video from 3-203 prime (VP) 2-16 selecting 3-186 selecting for playback 3-113 Selecting camera sectors 3-113 cameras (VP) 2-2. 3-174. 3-167. 3-227 assigning cameras to quadrants 3-232 changing to single view 3-229 configuration options 3-231 configuring 3-228 connecting regions 3-233 disconnecting regions 3-233 playback support 3-218 toggle between single 3-232 unassigning cameras from quadrants 3-232 Quadrants assigning cameras to 3-230. 3-163 RS-232 installing converter 3-259 RS-485 installing converter 3-259 S Save Image 3-110 Save Still Image 3-170 Saving configuration files 3-265 SiteManager configuration 3-10 still images 3-121. 3-210 Sequence Screen 3-204 buttons and features 3-205 Sequences 3-200 Server Alert log window tab 3-9 Server Alert Panel flag icon descriptions 3-256 Server Connection Options 3-23 Server Full Interface 3-42 Server Menu 3-7 Server Resource Icons 3-46 Server Resources 3-44 working with 3-46 Server Setup 3-42 accessing 3-42 Index-6 24-10248-56 Rev. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-197 removing from VGA monitors 3-212 searching the hierarchies 3-256 server 3-44 status of 3-46 using in groups 3-134 using in maps 3-160 using in views 3-181 Return to Live Mode 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Rewind 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Rewind Function (VP) 2-18 Rotate 3-156. 3-142. 2-10 using 2-14 Prime Sector 3-113. 3-164. 2-6 cameras with Pelco 9760 3-263 file location (config) 3-265 image quality (VP) 2-7 image resolution (VP) 2-7 monitors with Pelco 9760 3-263 sectors 3-186 size of icon 3-156. 3-188 still images (VP) 2-19.Index Preset 3-105 Presets (VP) 2-3. 3-104. 3-173. 3-196 selecting view 3-167 video clip 3-126 Quality Controls (VP) 2-10 Quit (VP) 2-3 Quitting VisionPocket 2-31 R RAS See Remote Access Service (RAS) Record User Activity 3-72 Recorded Audio listening to (VP) 2-27 Recording desktop activity 3-244 SiteManager screen 3-59 Red Flag 3-256 Refresh Button 3-252 Refresh Rate improving 3-52 Regions connecting/disconnecting in quad view 3-233 VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Related Documentation 1-4 Remember Window Positions 3-241 Remote Access 3-22 Remote Access Service (RAS) 1-2 RemoteControl 1-1–1-2 access to 3-42 accessing full interface of 3-44 RemoteView 1-1 Removing camera from network monitors 3-216 groups 3-132 network monitors 3-226 VGA monitor resources 3-212 Renaming server connections 3-35 Reset View 3-145 Resetting camera names 3-49 Resolution 3-196 limits with quad view 3-228 video clip 3-126 Resolution (VP) 2-7 Resource 3-7.

3-190 Synchronized Multiple Camera Playback 3-165. Index-7 . 3-137. 3-184 Synchronizing quad view feature 3-231 SiteManager configurations 3-264 System Log 3-6 configuring 3-246 log window tab 3-10 Index T Tabs 3-8 log on database 3-251 Talk Channels maximum supported 3-44 Technical Support 1-2 Text Insertion 3-126 Tile 3-8. 3-134. 3-136. 3-200 Show Sequence Screen 3-200 Show Status Bar 3-241 Show Toolbar 3-103 Show View 3-71. 3-155–3-156. 3-182. 3-1 exiting 3-11 managing configuration of 3-264 saving configuration of 3-10 sitemanager. 3-139. 3-131 Show Log Window 3-241 Show Map 3-71. 3-134. 3-48. 3-183 Setting reconnect attempts 3-255 Setting Up servers 3-18 Setup Monitor 3-201 Setup Screen displaying (VP) 2-2 Setup Server 3-19 Shading 3D maps 3-146 Show 3D Map 3-72 Show All Alarmed Cameras 3-69 Show Camera 3-47. Inc. 3-69. 3-48. 3-141 Show Monitor Group 3-234 Show Monitors Panel 3-241 Show Resource 3-45. 3-240 Time Lapse Sector 3-113.dat File 3-264 sitemanagerlog. 3-201 Show Camera on Monitor 3-72 Show Group 3-71. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 3-155–3-156. 3-155. 3-155–3-156. 3-21 User-Defined Quality 3-173 Users. 2-10 using 2-14 Turn Alarm Off 3-70 Turn Alarm On 3-70 Turn Aux Off 3-70 Turn Aux On 3-70 Turn Camera Aux Off 3-73 Turn Camera Aux On 3-73 Turn Off 3-45. 3-165 Turn On 3-45.dat File 3-264 Using 24-10248-56 Rev. 3-139. 3-134. 3-165 Turning Off auxiliaries 3-52 triggered alarms 3-74 Turning On auxiliaries 3-52 Type Drop-Down List 3-252 Types of user accounts 3-14 U Unassigning cameras from quadrants 3-232 Unblank 3-203 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) going offline 3-62 UPS See Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) User Accounts creating 3-13 deleting 3-16 editing 3-16 editing admin 3-11 types of 3-14 User Drop-Down List 3-252 User Management about 3-11 User Menu 3-7 User Passwords changing 3-17 User Permissions 3-15. 3-163. Inc. © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-195 Toolbar Options 3-8 Toolbars using camera video screen 3-109 Tools Menu 3-7 Tour 3-105 Tours (VP) 2-3. 2-22–2-23 file type features 3-120 finding 3-116 formats of 3-120 saving 3-121. 3-134. 3-137. 3-188 saving (VP) 2-19 searching on monitors 3-221 Stop Function (VP) 2-19 Support 1-2 Supported Formats 3-120–3-121. 3-172 Show View on Monitor 3-71 Silencing server alarms 3-100 Single Resource Mode 3-207– 3-209 Single Resource View 3-170 Single View Mode 3-218 changing to quad view 3-229 toggle between quad 3-232 SiteManager about 1-2.VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Server Status checks 3-253 monitoring 3-255 Servers about in SiteManager 3-18 connecting to 3-38 connecting to (VP) 2-4 creating 3-20 deleting 3-41 deleting connections to 3-35 disconnecting from 3-40 disconnecting from (VP) 2-5 editing broadband connections 3-33 editing dial-up connections 3-27 editing direct connections 3-31 editing network connections 3-26 editing properties of 3-41 editing VPN connections 3-29 exporting 3-25 importing 3-20 monitor compatibility 3-218 renaming connections to 3-35 resource menu options 3-45 resources 3-44 setting up 3-18 silencing alarms 3-100 Servers Tab 3-8 functions of 3-19 Set as View Point 3-156 Set Camera Priority 3-139 Set Priority 3-45. 3-48. 3-186 Time Period 3-252 Title 3-125. 3-167.mdb File 3-246 Smooth Shading 3-146 SMTP configuring settings for 3-59 Source (VP) 2-3 Specifications audio 3-54 Splitting log files 3-250 video clip files 3-126 Spot Monitor quad view feature 3-227 Start Function (VP) 2-18 Start of Archive 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Start Playback 3-110 monitor panel 3-204 Start Time 3-195 Status monitoring server 3-255 of group resources 3-135 of resources 3-46 Status Bar 3-7 Status Bar (VP) 2-3 Status Checks server 3-253 Still Images exporting (VP) 2-2. 3-161.

3-190 finding 3-116 formats of 3-120 playing back 3-114 playing back (VP) 2-16 playing back on monitors 3-218 saving 3-122. 3-55 VPN See Virtual Private Network (VPN) W Wavelet 2-16 support in quad view 3-228 Window Menu 3-7 Window Recorder 3-110 configuring 3-128 Window Size 3-104 Windows Menu Options 3-241 Wireframe 3-146 Y Yellow Flag 3-256 Z Zoom 3-105. 3-190 searching on monitors 3-221 splitting files of 3-126 title of 3-195 Video Display Priority adjusting 3-243 Video Export log window tab 3-9 VisionPocket and SiteManager Manual Video Footage playing back on monitor 3-264 saving on the fly 3-129 Video Resolution 3-104 Video Window (VP) 2-2 View Menu 3-7 View Screen 3-168 buttons and features 3-169 designing layouts for 3-175 using options 3-172 Viewing live video footage 3-199 Viewing Area 3-169 dividing 3-170 Views about 3-165 adding cameras to 3-178 adding maps to 3-178 as map resources 3-197 creating 3-170 deleting 3-171 displaying on VGA monitors 3-216 menu options 3-166 of 3D maps 3-152 positioning resources on 3-180 selecting quality 3-167 using resources with 3-181 Views Tab 3-8 Virtual Private Network (VPN) 1-2 connection 3-22 editing server connections 3-29 Virtual Video Desktop 3-6 about 3-239 buttons and features 3-240 configuring 3-242 VisionPocket 2-1 about 1-1 buttons and features 2-2 exiting 2-3. B This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Johnson Controls. 2-31 logging on 2-4 using main screen 2-1 VisionWeb 1-1 ActiveX manager 3-266 Visual Search 3-111. 3-192. . © 2011 Johnson Controls. 3-201 adding resources to 3-208– 3-210 cameras displayed on 3-208. 3-144–3-145 using (VP) 2-12 using PTZ 3-107 Zoom Control (VP) 2-11 Zoom Level 3-144 Index-8 24-10248-56 Rev.Index 2D maps 3-150 3D maps 3-151 camera dome auxiliaries 3-51 camera video screen options 3-103 digital zoom (VP) 2-12 group resources 3-134 identical camera names 3-49 log panel 3-249 main screen 3-5 map resources 3-160 optical zoom (VP) 2-12 Pelco 9760 keyboard 3-263 presets (VP) 2-14 PTZ keyboard shortcuts 3-108 PTZ Panel Screen (VP) 2-9 PTZ zoom 3-107 server resources 3-46 talkback feature 3-54 tours (VP) 2-14 view resources 3-181 view screen options 3-172 VisionWeb ActiveX Manager 3-266 V VGA Monitors 3-199. 3-214 deleting 3-226 disconnecting 3-218 displaying resources on 3-216 editing 3-206 grouping 3-233 maps displayed on 3-208 menu options 3-200 multiple camera playback on 3-220 panel options 3-203 playing back video on 3-218 removing resources from 3-212 sequence screen 3-204 views displayed on 3-209 Video Adaptive (VP) 2-3 Video Clips authenticating 3-126 destination of 3-195 file format descriptions 3-121. 3-170. 3-118. Inc. 3-123. Inc. 3-221 Volume adjusting audio 3-45.